P. 1
8.44 People Tools

8.44 People Tools

|Views: 37|Likes:
Published by Dhar Bab

More info:

Published by: Dhar Bab on Aug 07, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

12/03/2014

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Course Overview
  • Course Objectives
  • Technology Overview
  • Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology
  • Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer
  • Finding Information About PeopleSoft Application Designer in PeopleBooks
  • Navigating PeopleSoft Applications
  • • Navigate PeopleSoft applications
  • Navigating PeopleSoft Applications
  • Activity 1: Using Basic Navigation Tools
  • Using Search Pages
  • Activity 2: Using Search Pages
  • Identifying Definitions
  • Entering and Modifying Data
  • Activity 3: Entering Data
  • Finding Information Using PeopleBooks
  • Activity 4: Finding Information Using PeopleBooks
  • Explaining PeopleSoft Architecture
  • Describing PeopleSoft Databases
  • Activity 5: Examining PeopleSoft Databases
  • Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
  • Activity 6: Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
  • Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment
  • Activity 7: Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment
  • Organizing Data
  • Normalizing Data
  • Describing Relational Data Models
  • Activity 8: Normalizing Flat Data
  • Reading Data Models
  • Validating Data
  • Describing Prompt Tables
  • Using Effective Dating
  • Activity 9: Using Effective Dating
  • Comparing Validation Types
  • Activity 10: Viewing and Entering Prompt Values
  • Explaining Tableset Sharing
  • Activity 11: Determining Validation Strategies
  • Developing Applications by Using the Eight Steps
  • Describing the PeopleSoft Application Development Process
  • Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer Interface
  • Activity 12: Using the PeopleSoft Application Designer
  • Organizing Definitions in a Project
  • Activity 13: Organizing Definitions in a Project
  • Designing the Application
  • Planning the Application
  • Activity 14: Choosing Design Participants
  • Determining Functional Specifications
  • Activity 15: Determining Functional Specifications
  • Determining Technical Specifications
  • Describing the Training Application
  • Defining Fields
  • Discussing Fields in PeopleSoft Applications
  • Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties
  • Activity 16: Examining Field Definitions
  • Creating Field Definitions
  • Activity 17: Creating Field Definitions for the Course Application
  • Assigning Translate Values
  • Activity 18: Creating Translate Values
  • Activity 19: Creating Field Definitions
  • Creating Record Definitions
  • Explaining Record Definitions
  • Accessing Record Definition Displays
  • Activity 20: Accessing Record Definitions Displays
  • Configuring Record Definition Properties
  • Activity 21: Examining Record Definition Properties
  • Configuring Record Field Use Properties
  • Activity 22 Configuring Record Field Use Properties
  • Configuring Record Field Edits Properties
  • Activity 23: Examining Record Field Edits Properties
  • Creating a Record Definition
  • Activity 24: Creating a Record Definition
  • Activity 25: Creating the T1_COURSE_MATL Record Definition
  • Building SQL Tables
  • Activity 26: Analyzing PeopleSoft Tables
  • Building Application Data Tables
  • Activity 27: Building Application Data Tables
  • Viewing Table Indexes
  • Activity 28: Viewing Indexes in a Table
  • Activity 29: Building the PS_T1_COURSE_MATRL Table
  • Creating Page Definitions
  • Identifying Page Design Principles
  • Identifying Page and Page Control Properties
  • Activity 30: Identifying Page and Page Control Properties
  • Adding Page Controls to a Page
  • Activity 31: Adding Page Controls to a Page
  • Activity 32: Creating Page Definitions
  • Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids
  • Activity 33: Implementing Scroll Areas
  • Activity 34: Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids
  • Finalizing Page Design and Layout
  • Activity 35: Finalizing Page Design and Layout
  • Activity 36: Building the Course Materials Page
  • Defining Components
  • Identifying Component Definition Basics
  • Activity 37: Identifying Component Definition Basics
  • Defining General and Use Properties
  • Defining Internet Properties
  • Building New Components
  • Activity 38: Building a Component Definition
  • Activity 39: Building the T1_COURSE_MATL Component
  • Registering Components
  • Explaining Component Registration
  • Examining Menu Definitions
  • Activity 40: Examining Menu Definitions
  • Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics
  • Activity 41: Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics
  • Navigating the Portal Registry
  • Activity 42: Navigating the Portal Registry
  • Planning Component Registration
  • Registering the Component
  • Activity 43: Registering the Component
  • Activity 44: Registering the T1_COURSE_MATL Component
  • Testing an Application
  • Creating and Analyzing Test Plans
  • Activity 45: Creating and Analyzing Test Plans
  • Testing Applications
  • Activity 46: Testing Applications
  • Troubleshooting Common Issues
  • Activity 47: Testing More of the Training Application
  • Editing the Registry Structure
  • Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
  • Activity 48: Examining the Portal Registry
  • Creating Folders
  • Activity 49: Creating Folders in the Portal Registry
  • Moving Folders or Content References to New Parent Folders
  • Activity 50: Moving Folders or Content References
  • Deleting Folders
  • Activity 51: Deleting Folders in the Portal Registry
  • Activity 52: Working with Folders in the Portal Registry
  • Creating Menu Definitions
  • Describing the Purpose of a Menu
  • Locating a Component on a Menu
  • Editing Menu Item Labels
  • Activity 53: Editing Menu Item Labels
  • Activity 54: Creating a Menu Definition
  • Analyzing the Impact of Design Changes
  • Determining Relationships Among Definitions
  • Activity 55: Determining Relationships Among Definitions
  • Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables
  • Activity 56: Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables
  • Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy
  • Building Applications
  • Designing an Application
  • Activity 57: Designing an Application
  • Creating Data Structures
  • Activity 58: Creating Data Structures
  • Creating User Interfaces
  • Activity 59: Creating User Interfaces
  • Activity 60: Testing the Application
  • Searching Applications by Using the Verity Search Engine
  • Describing and Performing a Verity Search
  • Activity 61: Performing a Verity Search
  • Generating a Registry Search Collection
  • Activity 62: Generating a Registry Search Collection
  • Adding Keywords to a Search Collection
  • Activity 63: Implementing a Verity Search Collection
  • Performing Data Audits
  • Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits
  • Implementing Field Level Audits
  • Activity 64: Performing a Field-Level Audit
  • Implementing Record Level Audits
  • Activity 65: Implementing Record Level Audits
  • Importing and Exporting Projects
  • Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases
  • Exporting Projects
  • Activity 66: Exporting Projects
  • Importing Projects
  • Activity 67: Importing Projects
  • Final Course Activity
  • Activity 68: Creating a Course Evaluation Application
  • Course Review
  • Completed Objectives
  • Navigating a PeopleSoft Application
  • Describing the Elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
  • Describing PeopleSoft Data Organization and Validation
  • Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development
  • Describing Additional Application Development Considerations
  • Organizing Definitions into Projects
  • Curriculum Map

FOR

INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!



Student Guide
PeopleTools I
January 2004
STU-400-844
PeopleSoft
PeopleTools 8.44









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!



PeopleTools I
STU-400-844
Restricted Rights
Copyright 2004 PeopleSoft, Inc.
All rights reserved.
All material contained in this document is proprietary and confidential to PeopleSoft, Inc.
and is protected by copyright laws. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored
in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including, but not
limited to, electronic, graphic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without
the prior written permission of PeopleSoft, Inc.
This document is subject to change without notice, and PeopleSoft, Inc. does not warrant
that the material contained in this document is free of errors. Any errors found in this
document should be reported to PeopleSoft, Inc. in writing.
PeopleTalk and “People power the internet.” are trademarks; and PeopleSoft, the
PeopleSoft logo, PeopleTools, PS/nVision, PeopleCode, PeopleBooks, Vantive, Vantive
Enterprise and Red Pepper are registered trademarks of PeopleSoft, Inc. All other
trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l i i i
CONT E NT S

PeopleTools I.....................................................................................................................ix
Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues ....................................................................ix
Related Documentation.......................................................................................................x
Course Overview...............................................................................................................1
Course Objectives ...............................................................................................................1
Agenda: ...............................................................................................................................2
Technology Overview........................................................................................................7
Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology ........................................8
Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer..............................................................13
Finding Information About PeopleSoft Application Designer in PeopleBooks................16
Navigating PeopleSoft Applications...............................................................................19
Navigating PeopleSoft Applications .................................................................................20
Activity 1: Using Basic Navigation Tools........................................................................26
Using Search Pages ...........................................................................................................27
Activity 2: Using Search Pages .....................................................................................34
Identifying Definitions ......................................................................................................35
Entering and Modifying Data ...........................................................................................42
Activity 3: Entering Data...............................................................................................47
Finding Information Using PeopleBooks..........................................................................48
Activity 4: Finding Information Using PeopleBooks........................................................51
Explaining PeopleSoft Architecture ..............................................................................53
Describing PeopleSoft Databases......................................................................................54
Activity 5: Examining PeopleSoft Databases............................................................59
Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture .........................................60
Activity 6: Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture ..............68
Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment ..........................................69
Activity 7: Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment ...............73
Organizing Data ..............................................................................................................75
Normalizing Data ..............................................................................................................76
Describing Relational Data Models ..................................................................................77
Activity 8: Normalizing Flat Data.............................................................................83
Reading Data Models ........................................................................................................84
Validating Data................................................................................................................91
Describing Prompt Tables .................................................................................................92
Using Effective Dating......................................................................................................94
Preface
Lesson 1
Lesson 2
Lesson 3
Lesson 4
Lesson 5
Lesson 6









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eTo o l s I Co n t en t s
i v Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
Activity 9: Using Effective Dating..........................................................................103
Comparing Validation Types ..........................................................................................104
Activity 10: Viewing and Entering Prompt Values...................................................107
Explaining Tableset Sharing ...........................................................................................108
Activity 11: Determining Validation Strategies ........................................................110
Developing Applications by Using the Eight Steps.....................................................113
Describing the PeopleSoft Application Development Process........................................114
Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer Interface.............................................117
Activity 12: Using the PeopleSoft Application Designer..........................................119
Organizing Definitions in a Project.................................................................................120
Activity 13: Organizing Definitions in a Project.......................................................125
Designing the Application.............................................................................................127
Planning the Application.................................................................................................128
Activity 14: Choosing Design Participants ...............................................................130
Determining Functional Specifications ...........................................................................131
Activity 15: Determining Functional Specifications .................................................133
Determining Technical Specifications ............................................................................134
Describing the Training Application...............................................................................138
Defining Fields ...............................................................................................................141
Discussing Fields in PeopleSoft Applications.................................................................142
Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties..........................................................145
Activity 16: Examining Field Definitions .................................................................152
Creating Field Definitions...............................................................................................153
Activity 17: Creating Field Definitions for the Course Application .........................155
Assigning Translate Values.............................................................................................156
Activity 18: Creating Translate Values .....................................................................160
Activity 19: Creating Field Definitions.....................................................................161
Creating Record Definitions.........................................................................................163
Explaining Record Definitions........................................................................................164
Accessing Record Definition Displays............................................................................166
Accessing Record Definitions Displays ..........................................................................168
Activity 20: Accessing Record Definitions Displays................................................169
Configuring Record Definition Properties ......................................................................170
Activity 21: Examining Record Definition Properties ..............................................174
Configuring Record Field Use Properties .......................................................................175
Activity 22 Configuring Record Field Use Properties .............................................184
Configuring Record Field Edits Properties .....................................................................185
Activity 23: Examining Record Field Edits Properties .............................................190
Creating a Record Definition ..........................................................................................191
Activity 24: Creating a Record Definition ................................................................194
Activity 25: Creating the T1_COURSE_MATL Record Definition.........................195
Lesson 7
Lesson 8
Lesson 9
Lesson 10









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co n t en t s Pe o p l eTo o l s I
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l v
Building SQL Tables.....................................................................................................197
Describing the Relationship Between Record Definitions and Application Data
Tables ..............................................................................................................................198
Activity 26: Analyzing PeopleSoft Tables ................................................................201
Building Application Data Tables...................................................................................202
Activity 27: Building Application Data Tables.........................................................209
Viewing Table Indexes....................................................................................................210
Activity 28: Viewing Indexes in a Table...................................................................212
Activity 29: Building the PS_T1_COURSE_MATRL Table ...................................213
Creating Page Definitions .............................................................................................215
Identifying Page Design Principles .................................................................................216
Identifying Page and Page Control Properties.................................................................224
Activity 30: Identifying Page and Page Control Properties ......................................239
Adding Page Controls to a Page......................................................................................240
Activity 31: Adding Page Controls to a Page............................................................248
Creating Page Definitions ...............................................................................................249
Activity 32: Creating Page Definitions .....................................................................258
Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids .............................................................................259
Activity 33: Implementing Scroll Areas....................................................................268
Activity 34: Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids...................................................269
Finalizing Page Design and Layout.................................................................................270
Activity 35: Finalizing Page Design and Layout ......................................................275
Activity 36: Building the Course Materials Page......................................................276
Defining Components....................................................................................................279
Identifying Component Definition Basics.......................................................................280
Activity 37: Identifying Component Definition Basics.............................................291
Defining General and Use Properties..............................................................................292
Defining Internet Properties ............................................................................................296
Building New Components .............................................................................................300
Activity 38: Building a Component Definition.........................................................304
Activity 39: Building the T1_COURSE_MATL Component ...................................305
Registering Components...............................................................................................307
Explaining Component Registration ...............................................................................308
Examining Menu Definitions ..........................................................................................310
Activity 40: Examining Menu Definitions ................................................................313
Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics...........................................................................314
Activity 41: Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics.................................................321
Navigating the Portal Registry ........................................................................................322
Activity 42: Navigating the Portal Registry ..............................................................326
Planning Component Registration...................................................................................327
Registering the Component .............................................................................................333
Activity 43: Registering the Component ...................................................................337
Lesson 11
Lesson 12
Lesson 13
Lesson 14









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eTo o l s I Co n t en t s
v i Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
Activity 44: Registering the T1_COURSE_MATL Component ..............................338
Testing an Application..................................................................................................341
Creating and Analyzing Test Plans .................................................................................342
Activity 45: Creating and Analyzing Test Plans .......................................................347
Testing Applications........................................................................................................348
Activity 46: Testing Applications .............................................................................349
Troubleshooting Common Issues....................................................................................350
Activity 47: Testing More of the Training Application ............................................356
Editing the Registry Structure .....................................................................................359
Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation ................................360
Activity 48: Examining the Portal Registry ..............................................................370
Creating Folders ..............................................................................................................371
Activity 49: Creating Folders in the Portal Registry .................................................375
Moving Folders or Content References to New Parent Folders......................................376
Activity 50: Moving Folders or Content References.................................................378
Deleting Folders ..............................................................................................................379
Activity 51: Deleting Folders in the Portal Registry .................................................381
Activity 52: Working with Folders in the Portal Registry.........................................382
Creating Menu Definitions ...........................................................................................385
Describing the Purpose of a Menu ..................................................................................386
Locating a Component on a Menu ..................................................................................388
Editing Menu Item Labels...............................................................................................390
Activity 53: Editing Menu Item Labels.....................................................................393
Creating Menu Definitions..............................................................................................394
Activity 54: Creating a Menu Definition...................................................................398
Analyzing the Impact of Design Changes....................................................................401
Determining Relationships Among Definitions ..............................................................402
Activity 55: Determining Relationships Among Definitions ....................................405
Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables ................................................406
Activity 56: Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables ......................411
Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy ....................................................412
Building Applications....................................................................................................419
Designing an Application................................................................................................420
Activity 57: Designing an Application......................................................................421
Creating Data Structures .................................................................................................422
Activity 58: Creating Data Structures .......................................................................426
Creating User Interfaces..................................................................................................427
Activity 59: Creating User Interfaces........................................................................431
Testing Applications........................................................................................................432
Activity 60: Testing the Application.........................................................................433
Lesson 15
Lesson 16
Lesson 17
Lesson 18
Lesson 19









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co n t en t s Pe o p l eTo o l s I
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l v i i
Searching Applications by Using the Verity Search Engine......................................435
Describing and Performing a Verity Search....................................................................436
Activity 61: Performing a Verity Search...................................................................442
Generating a Registry Search Collection ........................................................................443
Activity 62: Generating a Registry Search Collection ..............................................444
Adding Keywords to a Search Collection .......................................................................445
Activity 63: Implementing a Verity Search Collection.............................................448
Performing Data Audits................................................................................................451
Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits .............................452
Implementing Field Level Audits....................................................................................456
Activity 64: Performing a Field-Level Audit ............................................................458
Implementing Record Level Audits ................................................................................459
Activity 65: Implementing Record Level Audits ......................................................467
Importing and Exporting Projects...............................................................................469
Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases .............................470
Exporting Projects ...........................................................................................................474
Activity 66: Exporting Projects.................................................................................476
Importing Projects ...........................................................................................................477
Activity 67: Importing Projects.................................................................................479
Final Course Activity ....................................................................................................481
Activity 68: Creating a Course Evaluation Application............................................482
Course Review...............................................................................................................483
Completed Objectives .....................................................................................................483
Navigating a PeopleSoft Application..............................................................................484
Describing the Elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture...................................486
Describing PeopleSoft Data Organization and Validation..............................................488
Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development ....................................490
Describing Additional Application Development Considerations ..................................495
Performing Searches and Audits of Application Data ....................................................496
Organizing Definitions into Projects...............................................................................498
Curriculum Map ...........................................................................................................499
Lesson 20
Lesson 21
Lesson 22
Lesson 23
Lesson 24
Appendix A









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eTo o l s I Co n t en t s
v i i i Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l











FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l i x
Pr e f a c e
PeopleTools I
Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues
This section discusses:
• Typographical conventions.
• Visual cues.
Typographical Conventions
This table contains the typographical conventions that are used in this guide:
Typographical Convention Description
Bold Indicates PeopleCode function names, method names, language
constructs, and PeopleCode reserved words that must be included
literally in the function call.
Italics Indicates field values, emphasis, and PeopleSoft or other book-
length publication titles. In PeopleCode syntax, italic items are
placeholders for arguments that your program must supply.
We also use italics when we refer to words as words or letters as
letters, as in the following: Enter the letter O.
KEY+KEY Indicates a key combination action. For example, a plus sign (+)
between keys means that you must hold down the first key while
you press the second key. For ALT+W, hold down the ALT key
while you press the W key.
Monospace font Indicates a PeopleCode program or other code example.
“ ” (quotation marks) Indicate lesson and chapter titles in cross-references and words that
are used differently from their intended meanings.
. . . (ellipses) Indicate that the preceding item or series can be repeated any
number of times in PeopleCode syntax.
{ } (curly braces) Indicate a choice between two options in PeopleCode syntax.
Options are separated by a pipe ( | ).
[ ] (square brackets) Indicate optional items in PeopleCode syntax.
& (ampersand) When placed before a parameter in PeopleCode syntax, an
ampersand indicates that the parameter is an already instantiated
object.
Ampersands also precede all PeopleCode variables.









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eTo o l s I Pr ef ac e
x Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
Visual Cues
Training courses contain the following visual cues.
Notes
Notes indicate information that you should pay particular attention to as you work with
the PeopleSoft system.
Note. Example of a note.
If the note is preceded by Important!, the note is crucial and includes information that
concerns what you must do for the system to function properly.
Important! Example of an important note.
Warnings
Warnings indicate crucial configuration considerations. Pay close attention to warning
messages.
Warning! Example of a warning.
Cross-References
Training guides provide cross-references either under the heading “See Also” or on a
separate line preceded by the word See. Cross-references lead to other documents, such
as PeopleBooks, that are pertinent to the immediately preceding documentation.
Example:

Example of cross-reference to a PeopleBook
Related Documentation
PeopleSoft applications are documented in PeopleBooks, which are delivered on the
PeopleBooks CD-ROM. You can also order printed, bound versions of PeopleBooks
through the Documentation section of the PeopleSoft Customer Connection website. You
can find updates and additional documentation for each release on the PeopleSoft
Customer Connection website.
See Also
PeopleSoft Customer Connection, http://www.peoplesoft.com/corp/en/login.asp









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1
L e s s o n 1
Course Overview
Course Objectives
By the end of this course, you will be able to:
• Describe PeopleSoft application design and the technology behind this process.
• Navigate a PeopleSoft application.
• Describe the elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture.
• Describe PeopleSoft data organization and validation.
• Implement the eight steps of application development.
• Describe additional application development considerations.
• Perform searches and audits of application data.
• Organize definitions into projects.
• Demonstrate competence in PeopleSoft application development methodology.
Slide 3 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 1
2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Agenda: Day One
On day one, we will provide an overview of the course content and discuss these topics:
• Navigating PeopleSoft Applications.
• Describing the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture.
• Organizing Data.
• Validating Data.
• Implementing the Eight Steps of PeopleSoft Application Development.
Slide 4 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 Co u r s e Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3

Agenda: Day Two
On day two, we will discuss these topics:
• Designing the Application.
• Creating Field Definitions.
• Creating Record Definitions.
• Building the Table.
Slide 5 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 1
4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Agenda: Day Three
On day three, we will discuss these topics:
• Creating Page Definitions.
• Creating Component Definitions.
• Registering the Component.
• Testing the Application.
Slide 6 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 Co u r s e Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5

Agenda: Day Four
On day four, we will discuss these topics:
• Editing the Registry.
• Creating Menu Definitions.
• Describing Design Considerations and Impact Analysis.
• Reviewing Application Development.
Slide 7 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 1
6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Agenda: Day Five
On day five, we will discuss these topics:
• Describing the Verity Search Engine.
• Performing Data Audits.
• Importing and Exporting Projects.
• Final Course Activity.
Slide 8 ________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7
L e s s o n 2
Technology Overview
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to describe:
• PeopleSoft application development methodology
• PeopleSoft Application Designer
• Find information about the PeopleSoft Application Designer in PeopleBooks.
Slide 10 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology
PeopleSoft application development is a four-phase process that introduces you to
creating applications in the PeopleSoft environment. The phases are:
• Planning the application
• Building the data structures
• Building the user interface
• Testing the application
Slide 11 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9

Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology (continued)
Phase 1, the planning phase, is the most important phase of development. Elements of
planning include:
• Design analysis
• Fit-gap analysis
• Cost analysis
• Resource analysis
• Contingency analysis
Slide 12 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
1 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology (continued)
In phase 2, the data design phase, you begin building the data structures phase. Elements
of data design include:
• Create field definitions
• Create record definitions
• Build SQL tables
Slide 13 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1

Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology (continued)
In phase 3, the user interface phase, you begin building the user interface structures.
Elements of user interface phase include:
• Create page definitions
• Create component definitions
• Set up user navigation
• Set up user security
Slide 14 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
1 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Application Development Methodology (continued)
In phase 4, the testing phase, you verify the data structures and user interface. Elements
of data design include:
• Verify navigation
• Verify security
• Enter and verify data
Slide 15 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer
Use the PeopleSoft Application Designer to complete most development tasks in a
PeopleSoft environment. The Application Designer performs many development tasks
including:
• Creating all definitions used in a PeopleSoft environment.
• Creating PeopleCode programs.
• Creating Application Engine programs.
• Creating internet workflow.
• Integrating products.
Slide 16 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
1 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer (continued)
Some development tasks that you do not perform in the Application Designer are:
• Setting up Definition Security
• Creating queries
• Creating SQR programs
• Modifying COBOL programs
• Running PeopleSoft Data Mover scripts
Slide 17 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer (continued)
In this course, you use the PeopleSoft Application Designer to complete each of your
development requirements. You will use the PeopleSoft Application Designer to:
• Create field definitions.
• Create record definitions.
• Build the SQL tables.
• Create page definitions.
• Create component definitions.
• Set up component navigation.
• Set up user security.
Slide 18 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
1 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finding Information About PeopleSoft Application Designer in
PeopleBooks
Use the PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer to find
development information including:
• Information for planning application development.
• Information for creating data structures.
• User Interface design and implementation.
• Appendixes.
Slide 19 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table lists the locations of additional information in the PeopleTools 8.44
PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer:
Location Type of Information
Using PeopleSoft
Application
Designer
This chapter provides general usage information.
Development
chapters

These chapters discuss development concepts and tasks:
• “Working With Projects”
• “Creating Field Definitions”
• “Creating Record Definitions”
• “Building SQL Tables and Views”
• “Creating Page Definitions”
• “Using Page Controls”
• “Creating Component Definitions”
• “Using Registration Wizard”
Appendixes The appendixes provide reference information about the reports and workflows that
are delivered with the system.

You can access related material by clicking the Help link in the top, right corner of the
application page. This automatically takes users to the relevant information in the
appropriate PeopleBook.
Note. Context-sensitive help is constrained to non-application specific pages in the
technical database.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7

Finding Information About PeopleSoft Application Designer in
PeopleBooks (continued)
The following PeopleBooks contain information that applies to PeopleSoft Application
Designer 8.44 and application development using PeopleTools:
• PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer
• PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Security Administration
• PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology
• PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleCode Developer's Guide
Slide 20 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table describes the additional PeopleBooks that contain information about
PeopleSoft Application Designer and application development using PeopleTools.
PeopleBook Description
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook:
PeopleSoft Application Designer
This PeopleBook describes the fundamental elements of developing
applications for PeopleSoft Internet Architecture.
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook:
Security Administration
This PeopleBook describes the interface, tables, and other components
associated with PeopleSoft security and how you can use them to
secure pages, fields, and other definitions.
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook:
Internet Technology
This PeopleBook describes PeopleTools internet technology,
including PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (PIA) and PeopleTools
portal technology used for creating and managing portals.
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook:
PeopleCode Developer's Guide
This PeopleBook covers the concepts of PeopleCode, tips for using
PeopleCode, the interaction of PeopleCode and the Component
Processor, and a number of other specialized topics, such as the use of
the PeopleCode debugger and referencing data in the component
buffer.

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tec h n o l o gy Ov e r v i e w L e s s o n 2
1 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• The PeopleSoft application design methodology creates a framework for
development.
• The PeopleSoft Application Designer is the primary tool for application development
in a PeopleSoft environment.
• You can find information about the PeopleSoft Application Designer in a variety of
PeopleBooks.
Slide 21 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9
L e s s o n 3
Navigating PeopleSoft
Applications
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Navigate PeopleSoft applications.
• Use search pages.
• Identify definitions.
• Enter and modify data.
• Find information using PeopleBooks.
Slide 23 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
2 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications
To sign in to a PeopleSoft application, you need three things:
• A URL
• A valid user ID
• The correct password for the user ID
Slide 24 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
After signing in, the homepage appears in the browser. The homepage contains three
major areas:
• The menu pagelet, a hierarchy of folders and content references.
• The header, which contains quick access to navigational aids.
• The target area, which displays content.
Slide 25 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the homepage to display the navigation area, header, and target area.

PeopleSoft homepage
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Administering Portal Homepages
and Pagelets”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
2 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
Two elements make up the navigation:
• Folders.
• Content references.
Slide 26 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the menu pagelet to navigate using folders and content references.

The menu pagelet
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Administering Portal Homepages
and Pagelets”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
You can define content that you use often as a favorite. There are
• PeopleSoft favorites.
• Browser favorites or bookmarks.
Slide 27 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
2 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
PeopleSoft favorites are different from browser favorites or bookmarks.
Browser Favorites PeopleSoft Favorites
You can access them at any time. You must sign in to access them.
They are stored on a local hard disk. They are stored in the portal database.
They are limited to a single computer and cannot be
accessed from different locations.
They stay with a user ID in the database and can be
accessed from any browser after signing in.
Any users can see the same favorites, regardless of
PeopleSoft user ID.
Favorites are stored by user ID.
Slide 28 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5

Navigating PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
Another method of navigation is through the search feature on the homepage. To use the
search feature:
1. Type the word that you want to search.
2. Click the Go button.
3. Select the link that best suits your needs.
Slide 29 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Search page as an alternate means of navigation.

Search page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Understanding PeopleSoft Portal
Technology ”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
2 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 1: Using Basic Navigation Tools
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
1. Sign in.
2. Use content references to load components.
3. Create PeopleSoft favorites.
4. Navigate with searches.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 3, “Navigating PeopleSoft Applications,”
Activity 1: Using Basic Navigation Tools.
Slide 30 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7

Using Search Pages
You have already seen a number of search pages; they appear when you click on most
content references in navigation. Search pages:
• Enable users to find the data they are interested in viewing.
• Are an interim step between content reference and component.
• Allow the user to select from a list of data rows.
• Are dynamically built based on several definition properties.
Slide 31 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
2 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Search Pages (continued)
Depending on how you configure a component, you may see:
• A basic search page.
• An advanced search page.
Slide 32 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use this page to do a basic search for student information.
Page Name Navigation
Personal Information Students, Personal Information
Click the Basic Search link.
Personal Information Students, Personal Information
Click the Advanced Search link.

• Use the basic search page to find the row of data that you need.

Basic search page for Student Personal Information
• Use the advanced search page to further constrain the rows of data you need.









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9

Advanced search page for Student Personal Information
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Using PeopleSoft Applications, “Using Keys and Search
Pages”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
3 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Search Pages (continued)
The search fields that appear on the page are determined in the record definition. They
are termed
• Search keys.
• Alternate search keys.
Slide 33 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Record Field properties dialog to select search properties.
Dialog Name Navigation
Record Field Properties File, Open,
Select Record in the Definition field.
Select a record.
Double click a field


Record field properties
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Working with
Records”









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Using PeopleSoft Applications, “Using Keys and Search
Pages”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
3 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Search Pages (continued)
You can create custom searches. These searches:
• Are stored by userID.
• Are available on the Advanced Search page only.
• Are available for use in other search pages that use the same search record.
Slide 34 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Save Search As Students, Personal Information
Click the Save Search Criteria link.

• Use the Save Search page to save search criteria that is used often.

Save Search As page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Using PeopleSoft Applications, “Using Keys and Search
Pages”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3

Using Search Pages (continued)
There are four steps to creating a saved search:
1. Enter search criteria on a search page.
2. Click the Save Search Criteria link.
3. Enter a name for the search.
4. Click the Save button.
Slide 35 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
3 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 2: Using Search Pages
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and use the search page to locate data
in the application.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 3, “Navigating PeopleSoft Applications,”
Activity 2: Using Search Pages.
Slide 36 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5

Identifying Definitions
The PeopleSoft user interface is made up of several element types, all of which you must
understand in depth to develop in the PeopleSoft environment. This section discusses:
• Definition basics.
• Component definitions.
• Page definitions.
• Field definitions.
• Definition names.
Slide 37 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
3 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Definitions (continued)
Definitions make up the PeopleSoft user interface:
Record Record
Navigation
Field A
Page 1 Page 2
Security
Component
Field B
Field C
Field D
Field E
Field F
Field G
Field H

Interdependent PeopleSoft definitions
Slide 38 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7

Identifying Definitions (continued)
The component definition is central to the user interface. Component definitions
determine:
• The search page.
• The toolbar buttons at the bottom of the screen.
• The mode of the component – update/display, history, or correction.
• The pages that you access.
• Page tabs or hyperlinks.
Slide 39 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
3 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Definitions (continued)
The page defines what the user sees.
• Each component can hold multiple pages.
• Tabs at the top of the screen enable access to each page.
• Pages contain fields.
• Levels segment pages.
• All pages include a level 0, and many have other levels as well.
• Level 0 contains the highest-level key values that make a row of data unique.
• Level 0 key values are entered once, when a new row is created.
• A scroll area or a grid, if they exist, binds other levels.
Slide 40 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9

Identifying Definitions (continued)
Fields hold the data entered into the application database.
• Fields on a page hold data that you save to tables in the database.
• Fields support many data types.
• Fields can be interactive or display-only.
Slide 41 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
4 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Definitions (continued)
Pages can contain many different field types represented by different controls including:
• Edit boxes.
• Drop down list boxes.
• Check boxes.
• Radio buttons.
• Images.
Slide 42 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1

Identifying Definitions (continued)
From any component in the application, use CTRL + J to see an information page that
includes the names of the component definitions that make up the interface.
Slide 43 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use CTRL + J to see an information page showing the interface’s component definitions.
Page Name Navigation
Personal Details Instructors, Professional Details
Select an instructor.
Press CTRL + J.


Information displayed with CTRL+ J keyboard combination
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
4 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Entering and Modifying Data
Components include a series of buttons at the bottom of the screen.
• Save.
• Return to Search.
• Next/Previous in List.
• Add.
• Update/Display.
• Show History.
• Correct History.
Slide 44 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Configure these buttons in the component:

Component toolbar
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Component
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3

Entering and Modifying Data (continued)
If you prefer keystrokes to mouse clicks, there are keyboard alternatives for buttons and
other actions:
• Hot keys perform an action immediately.
• Access keys change the cursor focus to a button; you must press Enter to complete
the command.
Slide 45 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
For an online list of hot keys and access keys, press CTRL + K on the keyboard.
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Using PeopleSoft Applications, “Working with Browser-
Based Applications”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
4 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Entering and Modifying Data (continued)
When you add new rows of data for an entire component, you start by entering a new
high-level (level 0) key value. You add a new level 0 value from either:
• The search page
• The component
Slide 46 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Search page Students, Personal Information
Personal Details Students, Personal Information

• Use the search page to add a new value.

Personal Information search page
• Use the Add button on the Personal Details page to add a new value.









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5

Personal Details page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
4 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Entering and Modifying Data (continued)
To update existing information or insert new rows at level one:
• Use the insert row button in the scroll area.
• User the insert row button in the grid.
Slide 47 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Products by Customer Customer, Products Purchased
Purchase Order Purchasing, Maintain Purchase Orders

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7

Activity 3: Entering Data
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and enter your student data in the
database.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 3, “Navigating PeopleSoft Applications,”
Activity 3: Entering Data.
Slide 48 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
4 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finding Information Using PeopleBooks
PeopleBooks document PeopleTools and PeopleSoft applications. PeopleBooks offer:
• An integrated user interface as a Help link.
• Context-sensitive assistance where possible; displaying information related to the
screen that you are viewing.
• A navigational taxonomy for locating information.
• A text search capability.
Slide 49 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9

Finding Information Using PeopleBooks (continued)
When accessing PeopleBooks:
• You link immediately to the appropriate documentation for the page you are viewing
if context sensitive help exists.
• If no context-sensitive help is available, a page displays linking you back to the
PeopleBooks main menu.
Slide 50 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
5 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finding Information Using PeopleBooks (continued)
You can navigate PeopleBooks in several ways.
• PeopleBooks library
• Verity search
• Contents view
• Index view
• Search view
Slide 51 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The PeopleBooks library gives you multiple ways to access information:

PeopleBooks library
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 3 Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5 1

Activity 4: Finding Information Using PeopleBooks
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and find information using
PeopleBooks.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 3, “Navigating PeopleSoft Applications,”
Activity 4: Finding Information Using PeopleBooks.
Slide 52 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Na v i g at i n g Pe o p l e Sof t Ap p l i c a t i o ns L e s s o n 3
5 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that
• You navigate a PeopleSoft application by clicking on folders to find a content
reference.
• A search page presents you with options for finding the data that you want.
• PeopleSoft definitions are interdependent.
• You add high-level information at level 0 but you insert subordinate data at other
levels.
• PeopleBooks provide multiple ways of searching for information about an
application.
Slide 53 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5 3
L e s s o n 4
Explaining PeopleSoft
Architecture
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe PeopleSoft databases.
• Explain data transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture.
• Identify requirements for the development environment.
Slide 55 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
5 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Databases
Tables in PeopleSoft databases fall into three general areas:
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog

Three categories of tables
Slide 56 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5 5

Describing PeopleSoft Databases (continued)
System catalog tables contain the database metadata and:
• Track all objects in the entire database.
• Are analogous to a table of contents.
• Vary based on the platform.
Slide 57 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
5 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Databases (continued)
The PeopleTools tables contain metadata about the PeopleSoft application installed on
the database. PeopleTools tables:
• Have consistent structure between applications.
• Vary in content between applications.
• Have their content modified by PeopleTools such as PeopleSoft Application
Designer.
• Are converted to HTML, delivered to browser.
• Use the naming convention PS*, for example, PSPNLDEFN.
Slide 58 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5 7

Describing PeopleSoft Databases (continued)
Application data tables hold the data that users enter into the database:
• Specific tables are determined by application.
• Developers can create more.
• Content is modified through the user interface.
• Tables use the naming convention PS_, for example, PS_CUSTOMER_TBL.
Slide 59 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
5 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Databases (continued)
You can use a query tool to examine the contents of the tables, but do not change the
contents outside of the approved tools because the PeopleTools tables and the application
data table could become unsynchronized.
Slide 60 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 5 9

Activity 5: Examining PeopleSoft Databases
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and examine the contents of the
classroom database.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 4, “Explaining PeopleSoft Architecture,”
Activity 5: Examining PeopleSoft Databases.
Slide 61 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
6 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
The architecture behind PeopleSoft Internet Architecture takes the raw data from the
application database and delivers it in the form of an interactive user interface on a
standard web browser. Components of PeopleSoft Internet Architecture are:
• Browsers as clients.
• Web servers.
• Application servers.
• Database servers.
Slide 62 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 6 1

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
With PeopleSoft Internet Architecture, users do their work with a browser; no code is
required on the client. Advantages to delivering the user interface on a browser include:
• Easy access.
• Platform independence.
• Low bandwidth access.
• Simple application maintenance and deployment.
Slide 63 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
6 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
This diagram illustrates that the client does not have native capabilities to display
database content:
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Server
Browser
HTML 4
Compatible
Browser

Browser and database server
Slide 64 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 6 3

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
This graphic illustrates how a web server acts as the front end of PeopleSoft Internet
Architecture, delivering the HTML that the browser displays:
Application Data
Web Server
Web Services
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Server
Browser
HTML
HTML 4
Compatible
Browser

The HTML connection between the browser and the web server
Slide 65 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
6 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
As seen in this diagram, the application server completes the connection, managing
communication with the database and delivering HTML to the web server for display:
Application Data
Web Server
Web Services
Java Servlets
Application
Server
PeopleSoft
Services
Tuxedo/Jolt
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Server
Browser
HTML
Jolt
SQL
HTML 4
Compatible
Browser

The application server communicates with the web server and the database
Slide 66 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 6 5

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
When developing for PeopleSoft Internet Architecture interfaces, you must consider
issues that are not present in other prior releases:
• No code runs on the client.
• All code runs on the application server.
• Running code requires a server trip and a browser refresh.
Slide 67 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
6 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
Deferred processing is one possible solution to limit server trips. With deferred
processing:
• User actions and processed as a single batch.
• Processing normally takes place when user saves work.
• You can specify when you want the server to process.
• User experience is a large factor in its success.
Slide 68 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 6 7

Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (continued)
Multi-row insert is another development option to limit server trips. Multi-row
processing:
• Is used when entering multiple rows of data.
• Enables the user to enter the number of data rows to insert.
• Holds the data in the component buffer until you save the component.
Slide 69 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use this page to insert multiple rows:
Page Name Navigation
Purchase Orders Purchasing, Maintain Purchase Orders

Purchase Orders page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Guidelines for
Designing Pages”

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
6 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 6: Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet
Architecture
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Enter data on a page that defers processing.
• Enter data on a page that does not defer processing.
• Enter data on a page that includes a multi-row insert capability.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 4, “Explaining PeopleSoft Architecture,”
Activity 6: Explaining Data Transfer in PeopleSoft Internet Architecture.
Slide 70 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 6 9

Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment
The development environment primarily consists of the PeopleSoft Application Designer
and:
• Is installed on the Windows client with the installation of PeopleTools.
• Manipulates data in the PeopleTools tables on the database.
• Connects to the database directly or by means of an application server.
Slide 71 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
7 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment (continued)
This diagram shows the way that the two types of development workstations fit into the
architecture:
Application Data
Web Server
Web Services
Java Servlets
Application
Server
PeopleSoft
Services
Tuxedo/Jolt
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Server
Development
System (2-Tier)
Jolt
SQL
Development
System (3-Tier)
Tuxedo
SQL
HTML
HTML

Two-tier and three-tier connections
Slide 72 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table contrasts two-tier and three-tier connections:
Connection
Type
Communication
Protocol
Security Connection
Management
Simplicity Functionality
Two-tier SQL is inefficient
except when you
connect to a fast
local network.
This requires
direct database
connectivity.
There is
potential for
security
violations.
The database
server manages
this
connection.
This can slow
performance
when you
make multiple
connections.
You point an
ODBC
connector to
the database.
Manages all
tasks.









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7 1
Connection
Type
Communication
Protocol
Security Connection
Management
Simplicity Functionality
Three-tier BEA Tuxedo and
TCP/IP are fast,
especially over a
WAN.
The
connection is
managed by
the application
server. There
is less
exposure to
security
violations.
The application
server manages
this
connection.
The database
server has to
manage only
the connection
to the
application
server.
You must
configure an
application
server.
Does not
execute
PeopleSoft
Data Mover
commands or
perform
PeopleSoft
Application
Designer
upgrades.

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
7 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Requirements for the Development Environment (continued)
Unlike in previous releases of PeopleTools, developers need access to the entire
PeopleSoft Internet Architecture setup to test their work as this diagram illustrates:
Application Data
Web Server
Web Services
Java Servlets
Application
Server
PeopleSoft
Services
Tuxedo/Jolt
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Server
Browser
Windows Client
(2-Tier)
HTML
Jolt
SQL
Windows Client
(3-Tier)
Tuxedo
SQL
HTML 4
Compatible
Browser

PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
Slide 73 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 4 Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7 3

Activity 7: Identifying Requirements for the Development
Environment
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and identify terms
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, “PeopleSoft Architecture,” Activity 7: Identifying
Requirements for the Development Environment.
Slide 74 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ex p l a i n i n g Pe op l e Sof t Ar c h i t e c t u r e L e s s o n 4
7 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• A PeopleSoft database consists of three types of tables: System catalog tables,
PeopleTools tables, and application data tables.
• PeopleSoft Internet Architecture transfers data from the database to the application
server where it is transformed to HTML that is assembled by the web server and
presented to the user on a browser.
• Development environments require either a direct ODBC connection or an
application server connection to the database.
Slide 75 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7 5
L e s s o n 5
Organizing Data
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Normalize data.
• Describe relational data models.
• Read data models.
Slide 77 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
7 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Normalizing Data
The process of organizing data into logically related tables is called normalization. The
goal of normalization is to ensure that data is never entered in two places. Normalization:
• Can lead to complex designs.
• Often requires compromise, trading complexity for redundancy.
• Has several standard levels of normalization.
Slide 78 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7 7

Describing Relational Data Models
Because relational databases are used in a variety of contexts, RDBMS terminology
includes multiple expressions for the same element. This table lists some of these
expressions:
PeopleSoft Terms Equivalent Terms
Table File, set
Row Record, occurrence, entry, line
Column Field, item, data element, attribute
RDBMS terminology
Slide 79 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
7 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing Relational Data Models (continued)
Relational data modeling has three basic goals:
• Minimize data redundancy.
• Promote efficient retrieval of data.
• Maximize flexibility.
Slide 80 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 7 9

Describing Relational Data Models (continued)
This is an example of non-relational data about Mark Larsen:
Name Address Company Degree Skill Level
Larsen,Mark 1776 Mt. Diablo XYZ Corp AAS CSA M
Larsen,Mark 1776 Mt. Diablo XYZ Corp MBA DBD M
Larsen,Mark 1776 Mt. Diablo XYZ Corp DUP H
Larsen,Mark 1776 Mt. Diablo XYZ Corp PT H
Larsen,Mark 1776 Mt. Diablo XYZ Corp SQL M
Slide 81 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
8 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing Relational Data Models (continued)
Through normalization, relational database models separate data into tables that are
related to one another:
• Key structure establishes links between tables.
• There are two types of relationships: Parent/child and prompt.
• Keys play a role in both relationship types.
Slide 82 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table defines common terms that are used in relational databases:
Parent/Child The parent table stores basic information related to the
high-level key. Child tables use a complex key structure;
they share the same high-level key with the parent and
include at least one additional key.
Prompts The key from the prompt table is stored in the prompting
table. This is a form of data validation. In other databases,
this is often called a foreign or candidate key.

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 8 1

Describing Relational Data Models (continued)
To understand table relationships in a PeopleSoft application, you need to know these
terms:
• Search key
• High level key
• Prompt table
• Parent table.
• Child table
Slide 83 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
8 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing Relational Data Models (continued)
This diagram shows a prompt table, a parent table, and a child table.
STUDENT_ID STUDENT_NAME CUSTOMER_ID EMPHASIS
2001 Larsen,Mark D XYZ F
2003 Bechingham,Carol CONS T
2020 Carson,Kitty LSL T
PSU_STUDENT_TBL (Parent)
CUSTOMER_ID DESCR DESCR_SHORT
CONS Consulting Services Cons Srvs
LSL LoneStar Longhorn Cattle Co. LoneStar
XYZ XYZ Corporation XYZ
T1_CUST_TBL (Prompt)
Key
Key
STUDENT_ID SKILL PROFICIENCY
2001 CSA M
2001 DBD M
2001 DUP H
2001 PT H
2001 SQL M
Key Key
PSU_STUDENT_EXP (Child)
STUDENT_ID DEGREE SCHOOL_CODE MAJOR
2001 AAS NC0001 Business Management
2001 MBA MA1000 Business Administration
PSU_STUDENT_ED (Child)
Key Key (Duplicate)

Prompt table, parent table, and child table
Slide 84 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 8 3

Activity 8: Normalizing Flat Data
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and normalize flat data.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 5, "Organizing Data," Activity 8: Normalizing
Flat Data.
Slide 85 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
8 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Reading Data Models
Data models show the relationships between database tables:
• A conceptual model shows entity names and relationships.
• A physical model is more detailed and includes table names, key structure, and
column names.
• PeopleSoft delivers physical data models for all database applications.
Slide 86 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
You can find data models on Customer Connection at www.peoplesoft.com.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 8 5

Reading Data Models (continued)
This diagram shows an example of the physical data model:
CUSTOMER_ID
DESCR
DESCRSHORT
CUSTOMER_TYPE
PHONE
PSU_ADDRESS_SBR
CONTRACT_DT
TRAINING_UNITS
DESCRLONG
T1_CUST_TBL
STUDENT_ID
STUDENT_NAME
CUSTOMER_ID
EMPHASIS
SAME_ADDR_CUSTOMER
PSU_ADDRESS_SBR
PHONE
PROJECT_ROLE
PSU_STUDENT_TBL
STUDENT_ID
SKILL
PROFICEINCY
DATE_LAST_MAINT
PSU_STUDENT_EXP
STUDENT_ID
DEGREE
SCHOOL_CODE
MAJOR
GPA
GRADUATE_INDICATOR
PSU_STUDENT_ED

Physical entity relationship diagram
Slide 87 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
8 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Reading Data Models (continued)
This table shows the four types of connection symbols:

For each row A, row B has a minimum of one and a
maximum of one row.

For each row A, row B has a minimum of zero and a
maximum of one row.

For each row A, row B has a minimum of one and a
maximum of many rows (the crow’s foot means many).

For each row A, row B has a minimum of zero and a
maximum of many rows.
Slide 88 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 8 7

Reading Data Models (continued)
You read the relationships both ways, from A to B, then B to A. The following diagram
shows these relationships:
STUDENT_ID
STUDENT_NAME
CUSTOMER_ID
EMPHASIS
SAME_ADDR_CUSTOMER
PSU_ADDRESS_SBR
PHONE
PROJECT_ROLE
PSU_STUDENT_TBL
STUDENT_ID
DEGREE
SCHOOL_CODE
MAJOR
GPA
GRADUATE_INDICATOR
PSU_STUDENT_ED

Connection between two tables
Slide 89 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
8 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Reading Data Models (continued)
PeopleSoft data models are available in Visio, HTML, and PDF formats. Data models:
• Are included on the PeopleBooks installation CD.
• Can be downloaded from PeopleSoft Customer Connection by product line.
Slide 90 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 5 Or g a n i z i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 8 9

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• You can normalize data by removing redundancies among tables.
• A relational data model is a diagram that describes how tables in an application are
related.
• In a relational data model, connecting symbols describe the relationships between
tables.
Slide 91 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Or g a n i z i n g Dat a L e s s o n 5
9 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9 1
L e s s o n 6
Validating Data
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe prompt tables.
• Use effective dating.
• Compare validation types.
• Explain tableset sharing.
Slide 93 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
9 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing Prompt Tables
In a prompt table edit, field values can be filled or edited only from a list of values in the
prompt table. This diagram shows the prompt table PSU_INSTR_TBL filling values for
the Instructor field in the PSU_CRS_SESSN table.
INSTRUCTOR
EFFDT
EFF_STATUS
DESCR
BUSINESS_UNIT
LAST_NAME
FIRST_NAME
CURR_DEV_FLAG
COURSE_TYPE
FACILITY
PSIMAGEVER
PHOTO
PSU_INSTR_TBL
T1_CRS_SESSN
T1_COURSE
T1_SESSN_NBR
BUSINESS_UNIT
T1_START_DT
END_DT
T1_MAX_ENROLL
INSTRUCTOR
TRAINING_LOC
T1_CLASSROOM

Prompt table with values for the Instructor field
Slide 94 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Structurally, a prompt table is no different from any other application data table. It stores
values that other tables can validate against.
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Record
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9 3

Describing Prompt Tables (continued)
The Student page uses the customer table to provide valid values. When you select from
the search results, the key value from the prompt table is written to the field. If you enter
an invalid value, the system warns you and does not allow a save.
Slide 95 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
9 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Effective Dating
Tables containing an effective date (EFFDT) field as a key are called effective-dated
tables. Effective dating:
• Retains historical data.
• Stores data for future use.
Slide 96 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
To understand the value of effective dating, here are a few examples of challenges in
trying to maintain historical data or in noting future data changes.
Example 1: If Bryan Lake were promoted to senior clerk, would there be a record of his
being a clerk?
EMPLID (Key) NAME TITLE WAGE
1724 Lake,Bryan Clerk 10.50

Example 2: If Syndee Edmonds were to take a leave of absence (become an inactive
employee), how will it be recorded?
EMPLID (Key) NAME TITLE WAGE
9442 Edmonds,Syndee Associate 11.25

Example 3: If the product’s price changes at midnight, with the following table structure
you can’t make this happen.
PRODID (Key) DESCR COST RETAIL
100567 Tambourine 12.87 29.99
100568 Cowbell 4.22 11.99

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9 5

Using Effective Dating (continued)
These altered table structures solve the challenges:
EMPLOYEE PRODUCT
EMPLID (key)
EFFDT (key)
EFF_STATUS
NAME
TITLE
WAGE


PRODID(key)
EFFDT (key)
EFF_STATUS
DESCR
COST
RETAIL
Slide 97 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
These examples allow for the necessary changes:
Notice the EFFDT field in the Employee table:
EMPLID (Key) EFFDT(Key) EFF_STATUS NAME TITLE WAGE
1724
08/15/2002 A Lake,Bryan Clerk, Sr. 12.00
1724
05/11/2002 A Lake,Bryan Clerk 10.50
9442
01/01/2004 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442
06/01/2002 I Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442
11/28/1996 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25

Notice the EFFDT field in the Product table:
PRODID (Key) EFFDT (Key) EFF_STATUS DESCR COST RETAIL
100567 11/01/2002 A Backpack 13.22 32.99
100567 12/01/2000 A Backpack 12.87 29.99
100568 11/01/2002 A Mousepad 5.03 12.49
100568 12/01/2000 A Mousepad 4.22 11.99











FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
9 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Effective Dating (continued)
Effective-dated tables include three types of rows:
• Future
• Current
• History
Slide 98 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table defines terms that are used in effective dating:
Future The effective date is greater than the current system date.
Current The effective date is the closest to today, but is not in the future.
History The effective date is less than the current effective date.

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9 7

Using Effective Dating (continued)
When entering rows into effective-dated tables, you have four action choices:
• Add
• Update/Display
• Include History
• Correct History
Slide 99 _______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
• As you do with any other table, you use Add to create a new search key value:
EMPLID EFFDT EFF_STATUS NAME TITLE WAGE
9442 11/28/1996 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25

• Use Update/Display to edit data that is subordinate to an existing search key,
including inserting rows, as shown in this table:
EMPLID EFFDT EFF_STATUS NAME TITLE WAGE
9442 01/01/2005 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442 06/01/2002 I Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
In Update/Display mode, only the current and future rows are available to the user. You
can update the future rows and you can insert any row with an EFFDT greater than the
current row.
• Use Include History to view (but not change) historical data, as shown in this table:
EMPLID EFFDT EFF_STATUS NAME TITLE WAGE
9442 01/01/2005 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442 06/01/2002 I Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442 11/28/1996 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25

• Use Correct History to view and edit data regardless of effective date, as shown in
this table:
EMPLID EFFDT EFF_STATUS NAME TITLE WAGE
9442 01/01/2005 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
9 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
9442 06/01/2002 I Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25
9442 11/28/1996 A Edmonds,Sydnee Associate 11.25

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 9 9

Using Effective Dating (continued)
This table summarizes each action mode:
Action Can View Can Insert Can Update
Add NA New high-level key NA
Update/Display Current, future New effective date greater
than the current row
Future only
Include History History, current, future New effective date greater
than the current row
Future only
Correct History History, current, future Any effective date All rows
Slide 100 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 0 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Effective Dating (continued)
Entering data into effective-dated pages is unique. Even though all the data resides on a
single table, the page contains two levels. The current effective date for a given high-
level key is displayed. This design enables you to enter multiple effective dates for each
high-level key. All effective-dated pages follow these rules:
• All rows are categorized as history, current, or future.
• When you insert a new row, data for all fields is copied from the current row.
• When prompting to tables that are effective dated, only current, active values are
available.
Slide 101 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 0 1

Using Effective Dating (continued)
When a field on a page prompts against an effective-dated table, only current, active
choices appear. There are four possible combinations to consider, as described in this
table:
Table Writing To Prompt Table Behavior
No effective date No effective date All rows retrievable; displays the first 300
rows
No effective date Effective date Rows categorized against the system date;
current, active rows retrievable
Effective date Effective date Rows categorized by effective date; current,
active rows retrievable
Effective date No effective date All rows retrievable; displays the first 300
rows
Slide 102 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 0 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Using Effective Dating (continued)
This example shows both tables as effective-dated tables. Consider the following row for
the Department table. The MGR column uses values from the Personal Data table.

MGR field prompting to the EMPLID field
Slide 103 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 0 3

Activity 9: Using Effective Dating
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Use effective-dated tables.
• Use prompt tables.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 6, “Validating Data,” Activity 9: Using
Effective Dating.
Slide 104 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 0 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Comparing Validation Types
In addition to prompt tables, there are other types of validation:
• The translate table (PSXLATITEM) prompt.
• The Yes/No prompt.
Slide 105 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 0 5

Comparing Validation Types (continued)
Prompt and translate tables provide values for the users to select. However, the fields
they represent differ visually.
This is a summary of prompt and translate table characteristics:
Prompt Table Translate Table
Developers determine table structure. PeopleSoft developers determines table structure.
Users can access from any field configured to prompt. Values are tied to a specific field.
Users are taken to a search page to select a value. Users see a list of descriptions or radio buttons.
Users can maintain values. Developers maintain values.
Slide 106 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Personal Details page shows every type of prompt:
Page Name Navigation
Personal Details Students, Personal Information


Personal Details page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Record
Definitions”









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 0 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Comparing Validation Types (continued)
Using the translate table for prompts can enhance usability. Users can select a value with
two clicks instead of using the search page. This table shows considerations for when to
use prompt table edit and when to use translate table edit:
Consideration Prompt Table Edit Translate Table Edit
Number of choices Use when there are many choices.
The lookup page can show up to
300 lines and can be filtered with
search criteria.
Use when there is a short list, 30 or
fewer.
Maintenance Use when prompt values change
often. The prompt table is
accessible to the users who have
security access; users can maintain
values.
Use when the list of choices is
relatively static. The developer
enters values as a property of the
field definition.
Data structure Use when more than a description
has to be associated with the high-
level key.
Use when all you need is a
description of the value.
Caching This table is not cached. This table is cached for quick
access.
Slide 107 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 0 7

Activity 10: Viewing and Entering Prompt Values
in this activity, you will review the activity overview and view and enter prompt values.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 6, “Validating Data,” Activity 10: Viewing and
Entering Prompt Values.
Slide 108 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 0 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Tableset Sharing
Use tableset sharing to filter prompt table choices based on business rules. In PeopleSoft
applications, a large percentage of the tables are keyed with one of two fields:
• Business Unit
• SetID
Slide 109 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
In HCM applications, you will find these fields in many tables, although Business Unit is
not necessarily a high-level key.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 0 9

Explaining Tableset Sharing (continued)
Many PeopleSoft applications include prebuilt tableset sharing that filters results by
product line, department, reporting structure, region, and other organizational lines. This
diagram shows prompt values that have been limited by location:
Atlanta
Boston
Copenhagen
Mexico City
New York
Paris
San Francisco
Tokyo
Location
Prompt
Table
Atlanta
Boston
New York
San Francisco
Location Prompt
(USA)
Copenhagen
Mexico City
Paris
Tokyo
Location Prompt
(International)

Prompt values limited by location
Slide 110 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 1 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 11: Determining Validation Strategies
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and examine a data model of the
application that you will build in class. You will determine what data validation strategy
to use for a number of prompts, based on the five strategies introduced in this lesson:
• Prompt table edits
• Effective-dated tables
• Translate table prompts
• Yes/No edits
• Tableset sharing prompts
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 6, “Validating Data,” Activity 11: Determining
Validation Strategies.
Slide 111 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 6 Va l i d at i n g Dat a
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1 1

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Prompt tables are master lists of data that you can use to constrain data that you enter
in a field.
• Effective-dating logic divides data into historical, current, and future data.
• PeopleSoft applications are delivered with multiple types of validation.
• Tableset sharing allows you to use business rules to constrain data that a user can
access.
Slide 112 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Va l i d at i n g Dat a L e s s o n 6
1 1 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1 3
L e s s o n 7
Developing Applications by Using
the Eight Steps
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the PeopleSoft application development process.
• Describe the PeopleSoft Application Designer Interface.
• Organize definitions in a project.
Slide 114 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 1 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Development Process
In PeopleSoft environments, application development requires four phases:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

Application development phases
Slide 115 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1 5

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Development Process (continued)
You divide the four phases into the eight steps of application development.
1. Plan the application.
2. Define fields.
3. Define records.
4. Build tables.
5. Define pages.
6. Define components.
7. Register components.
8. Test the application.
Slide 116 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 1 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Development Process (continued)
The eight-step process affects every layer of tables.
1. Design the Application
2. Define New Fields
3. Create the Record Definition
4. Build the SQL Table
5. Create the Page Definition
6. Define the Component
7. Register Component
8. Test the Application
Database Server
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog

Tables affected by each development step
Slide 117 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1 7

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer Interface
The following diagram shows how the PeopleSoft Application Designer enters data into
PeopleTools tables:
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Database
Development
Workstation
Definitions
Build
Tables

PeopleTools tables
Slide 118 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 1 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the PeopleSoft Application Designer Interface (continued)
Pages comprise several definition types. Use the PeopleSoft Application Designer to
create and maintain definitions.
Slide 119 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 1 9

Activity 12: Using the PeopleSoft Application Designer
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Use the browser to examine a page.
• Use the PeopleSoft Application Designer to examine page elements.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 7, “Developing Applications by Using the
Eight Steps,” Activity 12: Using the PeopleSoft Application Designer.
Slide 120 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 2 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Organizing Definitions in a Project
A project is a container that holds references to many definitions. Use projects to:
• Group definitions into logical areas.
• Coordinate the work of several developers who are working on the same application.
• Better understand the relationships between definitions.
• Simplify access to definitions during development.
• Organize definitions to promote them from development to production.
• Streamline the migration of definitions from one database to another during the
upgrade process.
Slide 121 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 2 1

Organizing Definitions in a Project (continued)
You can insert definitions into a project in multiple ways:
• Select Insert, Current Definition into Project if the definition is open and active.
• Select Insert, Definition into Project if the definition is not open.
• Press the F7 key to insert a definition that is open and active.
• Press CTRL+F7 to insert a definition that is not open.
Slide 122 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 2 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Organizing Definitions in a Project (continued)
You can automatically include definitions that you create or alter in the project that you
have open; you must set a few tools options.
Slide 123 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path in the Application Designer to access this page:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Options Tools, Options
Select the Project tab.
Options Tools, Options
Select the Validate tab.

• Use the Options dialog box to set project preferences:

Options dialog box
• Use the Options dialog box to set project spell checking preferences:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 2 3

Options dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Working with
Projects”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 2 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Organizing Definitions in a Project (continued)
You create a project the same way that you create any definition in the Application
Designer:
1. Select File, New.
2. Select Project from the dialog box.
3. Select File, Save As.
Slide 124 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 7 De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 2 5

Activity 13: Organizing Definitions in a Project
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Open an existing project.
• Insert definitions into a project.
• Set project options.
• Create a new project.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 7 “Developing Applications by Using the Eight
Steps,” Activity 13: to Organizing Definitions into Projects.
Slide 125 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De v e l o p i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s by Us i n g t h e Ei gh t St ep s L e s s o n 7
1 2 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• To create a PeopleSoft application, use the eight steps of application development.
• The PeopleSoft Application Designer is the primary tool for developing PeopleSoft
applications.
• You organize definitions into projects to assist you when you upgrade the definitions.
Slide 126 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 2 7
L e s s o n 8
Designing the Application
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Plan the application.
• Determine functional specifications.
• Determine technical specifications.
• Describe the training application.
Slide 128 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 2 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Planning the Application
Designing the application or the planning phase, is the first stage of application
development, which this diagram illustrates:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Design
Application

The relative importance of the design phase
Slide 129 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 2 9

Planning the Application (continued)
In designing the application, consider your goals to include:
• Resource allocation.
• Cost constraints.
• Time.
• Contingency planning.
Slide 130 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 3 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 14: Choosing Design Participants
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and choose the participants of the
design phase.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 8, “Designing the Application,” Activity 14:
Choosing Design Participants.
Slide 131 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3 1

Determining Functional Specifications
A set of functional specifications is likely your starting point for development. Complete
specifications are:
• Well planned.
• Written by people with a variety of backgrounds.
• Sufficiently detailed with regard to table relationships, functional design, and so on.
Slide 132 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 3 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Determining Functional Specifications (continued)
PSU Training requires a list of its courses. Each course must include:
• Course code.
• Course description.
• Course type (such as PeopleTools or HRMS).
• Course length.
• Number of training units.
• PeopleTools version.
• Application version.
• Name of the curriculum developer (an instructor).
• On-site status.
Slide 133 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3 3

Activity 15: Determining Functional Specifications
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and ask questions about creating
specifications.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 8, “Designing the Application,” Activity 15:
Creating Functional Specifications.
Slide 134 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 3 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Determining Technical Specifications
The technical specifications identify:
• Field definitions.
• Record definitions.
Slide 135 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
These specifications identify the field definitions:
Name Type Length Label (Long/Short) Format Translate Exists
T1_COURSE Char 6 Course Code / Course Upper N N
EFFDT Date 10 Effective Date / Eff
Date
N/A N Y
EFF_STATUS Char 1 Status as of Effective
Date / Status
Upper Y Y
DESCR Char 30 Course Title / Title Mixed N Y
COURSE_TYPE Char 4 Course Type / Type Upper Y Y
T1_LENGTH_DAYS Num 2.1 Length (Days) /
Length
N/A N N
T1_UNITS Num 2.1 Training Units / Units N/A N N
T1_ONSITE Char 1 Available at
Customer Site / On
Site
Upper N N
INSTRUCTOR Char 4 Curriculum
Developer / CD
Upper N Y
T1_APP_REL Char 4 Application Release /
App Release
Upper Y N
T1_TOOLS_REL Char 4 PeopleTools Release /
Tools Release
Upper Y N

These specifications identify the record definition, T1_COURSE_TBL:
Name Key Srch List Req Edit Prompt Table Default
T1_COURSE Key Y Y Y N/A N/A N/A
EFFDT Key N N Y N/A N/A %Date
EFF_STATUS N N N N XLAT N/A A
DESCR Alt N Y Y N/A N/A N/A
COURSE_TYPE N N N Y XLAT N/A V









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3 5
T1_LENGTH_DAYS N N N N N/A N/A N/A
T1_UNITS N N N N N/A N/A N/A
T1_ONSITE N N N Y Y/N N/A Y
INSTRUCTOR N N N N Prompt PSU_INSTR_TBL N/A
T1_APP_REL N N N Y XLAT N/A 8.80
T1_TOOLS_REL N N N Y XLAT N/A 8.40

These specifications identify a page definition, T1_COURSE:

Course Details page
These specifications identify a component definition, T1_COURSE:
Element Value
Pages T1_COURSE
Item labels Course Details
Search record T1_COURSE_TBL
Actions Add
Update/Display
Update/Display All (Include History)
Correction (Correct History)
Default search mode Advanced
Default search action Update/Display
Toolbar buttons Save
Return to List
Next in List
Previous in List
Add
Update/Display









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 3 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
Update/Display All (Include History)
Correction (Correct History)











FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3 7

Determining Technical Specifications (continued)
As part of the technical specifications you must determine:
• Who can access the pages in the component.
• How the component appears in navigation.
Slide 136 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 3 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the Training Application
This application is partially complete. You have been looking at lists of students and
instructors that are a part of it. You will continue development and add more components.
This section discusses:
• The production schedule for this class.
• The application data model.
Slide 137 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 8 De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 3 9

Describing the Training Application (continued)
To maintain your production schedule, you have to add four application elements:
• Course and Course Materials.
• Course Session and Course Enrollment.
• Course Databases.
• Course Evaluation.
Slide 138 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table provides a project plan for the remainder of the course:
Application Description Due Date
Course and Course Materials Allows entry of all PSU courses
and links them to the materials
that are required to conduct them.
Two components.
Day 3
Course Sessions and Course
Enrollment
Allows courses to be scheduled
into sessions on various dates and
at various facilities, and allows
students to be enrolled in these
sessions. Two components.
Day 4
Course Databases Links a table of master databases
used on student workstations to
the courses with which they are
used. Two components.
Day 4
Course Evaluation Allows students to enter
evaluation information for each
course session. One component.
Day 5

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De s i g n i ng t h e App l i c at i o n L e s s o n 8
1 4 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Planning an application is the most important phase of development.
• Creating the functional specifications begins the process of defining the capability of
the application.
• You use the functional specifications to create technical specifications.
• The training application that you build will allow you to track students and the
courses they take.
Slide 139 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 4 1
L e s s o n 9
Defining Fields
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Discuss fields in PeopleSoft applications.
• Identify field definition types and properties.
• Create field definitions.
• Assign translate values.
Slide 141 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 4 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Fields in PeopleSoft Applications
After you design an application, you can start building it. In PeopleSoft applications, this
means creating definitions. Field definitions are the foundation for all other definitions.
This diagram illustrates the define fields design phase:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Define
Fields

Define field step of application development
Slide 142 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 4 3

Discussing Fields in PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
In this example, the entries CONS, LSL, and XYZ are data in the CUSTOMER_ID
columns:
CUSTOMER_ID DESCR DESCR_SHORT
CONS Consulting Services Cons Srvs
LSL Lone Star Longhorn Cattle Company Lone Star
XYZ XYZ Corporation XYZ Corp
Customer data
Slide 143 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 4 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Fields in PeopleSoft Applications (continued)
This diagram illustrates that field definitions can be used in many different record
definitions:
CUSTOMER_ID DESCR DESCR_SHORT
CONS Consulting Services Cons Srvs
LSL LoneStar Longhorn Cattle Co. LoneStar
XYZ XYZ Corporation XYZ
CUSTOMER_ID
Field Definition
STUDENT_ID STUDENT_NAME CUSTOMER_ID
2001 Larsen,Mark D XYZ
2003 Bechingham,Carol CONS
2020 Carson,Kitty LSL
EMPHASIS
F
T
T

The CUSTOMER_ID field definitions used in different tables
Slide 144 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 4 5

Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties
The PeopleSoft environment supports these field types:
• Char (character).
• Long (long character).
• Nbr (number).
• Sign (signed number).
• Dt (date).
Slide 145 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
See PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Field
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 4 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties (continued)
The PeopleSoft environment also supports these field types:
• Tm (time).
• DtTm (datetime).
• Img (image).
• Iref (image reference).
• Att (attachment).
Slide 146 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 4 7

Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties (continued)
Field properties include:
• Name.
• Type.
• Length.
• Label options.
• Translate values.
Slide 147 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 4 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties (continued)
As with all PeopleSoft definitions, field definitions are stored in PeopleTools tables. You
create and configure fields with the PeopleSoft Application Designer.
Slide 148 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
In the PeopleSoft Application Designer, use the following navigation paths to access
these definitions:
Definition Name Navigation
INSTRUCTOR (character field) File, Open
Select Field from the Definition drop-down list box
COMMENTS (long character field) File, Open
Select Field from the Definition drop-down list box
ADD_DT (date field) File, Open
Select Field from the Definition drop-down list box
ACTIONS (number field) File, Open
Select Field from the Definition drop-down list box

An example of a character field type is the INSTRUCTOR field:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 4 9

A character field type
An example of a long character field type is the COMMENTS field:

A long character field type
An example of a date field type is the ADD_DT field:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 5 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

A date field type
An example of a number field type is the ACTIONS field:

A number field definition










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5 1

Identifying Field Definition Types and Properties (continued)
Many field definitions come delivered by PeopleSoft. Examples include:
• EFFDT
• EFF_STATUS
• DESCR
• DATE
Slide 149 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 5 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 16: Examining Field Definitions
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and examine PeopleSoft field
definitions.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 9, “Defining Fields,” Activity 16: Examining
Field Definitions.
Slide 150 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5 3

Creating Field Definitions
This section discusses the basics of creating fields in the Course application:
• A review of the PSU_COURSE technical specifications.
• Steps to creating field definitions.
Slide 151 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 5 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Field Definitions (continued)
To create field definitions, perform these steps in the PeopleSoft Application Designer:
1. Select File, New.
2. Select Field from the list in the New Definition dialog box, and click the OK button.
3. Select the field type.
4. Configure the properties that are appropriate for the field type.
5. Enter a label ID, a long name, and a short name.
6. Select File, Save.
7. Enter a unique name.
8. Click the OK button.
Slide 152 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5 5

Activity 17: Creating Field Definitions for the Course Application
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and
1. Enter new field labels.
2. Create new field definitions.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 9, “Defining Fields,” Activity 17: Creating
Field Definitions for the Course Application.
Slide 153 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 5 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Assigning Translate Values
Values stored in the translate table are tied to specific field definitions. In this section you
will review the translate table and discuss:
• Expanding the technical specifications to include translate values.
• Entering translate values into appropriate fields.
Slide 154 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5 7

Assigning Translate Values (continued)
Translate values are assigned directly to field definitions and stored in the table
PSXLATITEM. It is best to use translate values when:
• The values are specific to one field and are not to be shared by any other fields.
• The only values that you require are labels that identify the content.
• The values do not change often.
Slide 155 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 5 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Assigning Translate Values (continued)
The four fields identified to have translate values in the technical specifications are:
• EFF_STATUS
• COURSE_TYPE
• T1_APP_REL
• T1_TOOLS_REL
Slide 156 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table extends your technical specification, including the translate values that must be
in place for each field definition that uses them. These rows show existing definitions:
Field Name Values Long Name Short Name
EFF_STATUS A
I
Active
Inactive
Active
Inactive
COURSE_TYPE D
E
F
H
M
S
T
V
X
Distribution
Enterprise Performance Mgmt
Financials
Human Resources
Manufacturing
Student Administration
Technical
Customer Relationship Mgmt
Multiple
Distrib
EPM
Financials
HRMS
Manuf
Stud Admin
Tech
CRM
Multi

These two rows show new definitions.
Field Name Values Long Name Short Name
T1_APP_REL 800
830
840
NA
8.00
8.30
8.40
Not Applicable
8.00
8.30
8.40
N/A
T1_TOOLS_REL 800
818
840
844
8.00
8.18
8.40
8.44
8.00
8.18
8.40
8.44









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 5 9

Assigning Translate Values (continued)
To enter translate values for a field, perform these steps:
1. Open the appropriate field.
2. Select File, Definition Properties.
3. Select the Translate Values tab.
4. Click the Add button.
5. Enter the name, effective date, long name, and short name.
6. Click the OK button.
7. Save the field.
Slide 157 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 6 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 18: Creating Translate Values
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
• Add translate values to the application release field.
• Add translate values to the tools release field.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 9, “Defining Fields,” Activity 18: Creating
Translate Values.
Slide 158 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 9 De f i n i n g Fi e l d s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 6 1

Activity 19: Creating Field Definitions
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and create field definitions for the
T1_COURSE_MATL table.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 9, “Defining Fields,” Activity 19: Creating
Field Definitions.
Slide 159 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Fi e l d s L e s s o n 9
1 6 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Fields are stand-alone, reusable definitions.
• You can create a variety of field types such as character, number, time, date, and long
character fields.
• To create field definitions you must choose a data type, enter values for labels, and
provide a unique name.
• Translate values are associated with specific fields.
Slide 160 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 6 3
L e s s o n 1 0
Creating Record Definitions
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain record definitions.
• Access record definition displays.
• Configure record definition properties.
• Configure record field use properties.
• Configure record field edits properties.
• Create a record definition.
Slide 162 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 6 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Record Definitions
Once the field definitions are in place, you organize them into record definitions, as this
chart shows:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Define
Records

Defining records in the data design phase of application development
Slide 163 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 6 5

Explaining Record Definitions (continued)
The data design phase consists of steps 2 through 4 of the application design process.
Creating record definitions is step 3. This diagram shows the relationship between the
definitions:

Data design phase of application development
Slide 164 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 6 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Accessing Record Definition Displays
Record definitions include properties for:
• Individual field definitions
• Each field in the record definition
• PeopleCode assigned to events with specific fields
• The record definition as a whole
Slide 165 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this definition in the PeopleSoft Application
Designer:
Definition Name Navigation
PSU_STUDENT_TBL File, Open
Select Record from the Definition drop-down list box.


PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 6 7

Accessing Record Definition Displays (continued)
When you open a record definition, you see the Field Display view:
• The display buttons on the toolbar allow access to different views.
• You can also use the View menu to see different record displays.
Slide 166 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
You can use the display buttons to access a summary of record field properties:

Display buttons for a record definition
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 6 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Accessing Record Definitions Displays (continued)
There are four views:
• The Fields Display view shows field properties of the record definition.
• The Use Display view shows record field properties that pertain to key structure and
default values.
• The Edits Display view shows how fields in the record definition prompt for data
validation.
• The PeopleCode Display view shows which fields in the record definition have
PeopleCode associated with them.
Slide 167 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Field display values are global attributes. Other display properties are local to the record
definition.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 6 9

Activity 20: Accessing Record Definitions Displays
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and access PeopleSoft field
definitions.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, “Creating Record Definitions,” Activity 20:
Accessing Record Definitions Displays.
Slide 168 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 7 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Definition Properties
The Fields Display view shows a summary of field definition properties. You cannot
change these properties in the record definition. You access these properties through the
record definition by right-clicking the field.
Slide 169 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
You can view field definition properties by right-clicking the record field and then
selecting View Definition from the pop-up menu:

Pop-up menu showing View Field Properties menu item
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7 1

Configuring Record Definition Properties (continued)
Record properties apply to the record as an entity. Record properties include:
• Documentation
• Record relationships
• Audit information
• Auto update information
Slide 170 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Record Properties File, Open
Select Record from the drop-down list box.

• Select the General tab in the Record Properties dialog box to view general record
properties:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 7 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

General tab in the Record Properties dialog box
• Select the Use tab in the Record Properties dialog box to view information about
record relationships and audits:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7 3

Use tab in the Record Properties dialog box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 7 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 21: Examining Record Definition Properties
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Examine field definition properties.
• Examine record properties.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, “Creating Record Definitions,” Activity 21:
Examining Record Definition Properties.
Slide 171 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7 5

Configuring Record Field Use Properties
In PeopleSoft record definitions, the following rules pertain to key structure:
• Typically, every record definition must include at least one key field.
• If a record definition is acting like a child, it must include the same key values as its
parent, in the same order, and at least one more key.
• If a record definition uses effective dating, the EFFDT field must be a key field in
descending order.
• Key fields are followed by duplicate order keys, in order of importance, then by
fields that are not keys.
• Alternate search key fields can appear anywhere among regular fields, in any order.
They do not need to be grouped.
• Key, duplicate order key, and alternate search key fields are mutually exclusive.
Slide 172 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 7 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
The Use Display view shows that the PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition has a
simple key structure, with a single key field: STUDENT_ID.
Slide 173 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Key fields precede non-key fields in a record definition.
Definition Name Navigation
PSU_STUDENT_TBL File, Open,
Select Record from the Definition drop down list box.


The key structure of the PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition
Note. You should place all long character fields and image fields as the last field in the
record definition.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7 7

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
If you double-click the STUDENT_ID field, the Record Field Properties dialog box
appears. The first configuration option on the Use tab is Keys. Fields can be one of three
types of key field options:
• Key.
• Search key.
• Alternate search key.
Slide 174 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
You have many options to choose for key structure:

Key options in the Record Field Properties dialog box
A Field can be designated a key, duplicate order key or alternate search key. These are
mutually exclusive properties. A key may be designated a search key. A duplicate order
key generates a search index but allows duplicate values. An alternate search key is
available on the search page for the component, but not as a key in the table structure. An
index is generated for alternate search keys.
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Record
Definitions”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 7 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
You build the search page by using the search key options. A field is available as a search
option when:
• A field is a key and a search key.
• A field is an alternate search key.
Slide 175 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the search properties of the PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition:

The Use view showing search options
In this example, the PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition builds the Personal
Information search page:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 7 9

Personal Information search page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 8 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
When you create field definitions, you enter the label ID. Keep these points about label
IDs in mind:
• Every label ID has a long name and a short name associated with it.
• Every field definition must have at least one label ID; many field definitions have
multiple label IDs.
• Configure each record field with the appropriate label ID.
• The default setting is ***Use Default Label***.
Slide 176 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Record Field label ID to select a specific label from all of the labels associated
with the field:

Record Field label ID drop-down list box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 8 1

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
If you want new data rows to include default values for some fields, enter the value in the
record field properties. Enter values for:
• Fields that use a check box (normally Y/N edits).
• Any fields that appear as radio buttons (normally translate edit fields).
• Effective date fields, usually with the system variable %date.
• Effective status fields, normally as active (A).
• Fields that validate against the translate table.
Slide 177 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Default Value dialog box to enter a default associated with the field:

Default Value dialog box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 8 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
The page control that you assigned in the Record Field Properties dialog box determines
how the field appears when you develop the page definition.
Slide 178 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Default Page Control drop-down list box to select a page control to be displayed
when this field is placed on a page definition:

Default Page Control drop-down list box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 8 3

Configuring Record Field Use Properties (continued)
You can select any page control from the Default Page Control list box; however, many
controls might not be appropriate. This table shows examples of optional page controls:
Characteristic System Default Optional Page Controls
Translate table edit Drop-down list box Radio buttons
Edit box (with prompt button)
Check box (if only two values)
Prompt table edit Edit box (with prompt button) Drop-down list box
Yes/No edit Check box Drop-down list box
Slide 179 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 8 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 22 Configuring Record Field Use Properties
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Examine combinations of key values.
2. Examine search options.
3. Examine label ID settings.
4. Examine default values.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, “Creating Record Definitions,” Activity 22:
Configuring Record Field Use Properties.
Slide 180 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 8 5

Configuring Record Field Edits Properties
You configure data validation on the Edits tab of the Record Field Properties dialog box.
You can validate a record field by:
• Selecting the Required check box.
• Selecting a Translate table edit.
• Selecting a Yes/No table edit.
• Selecting a Prompt table edit.
• Selecting a Prompt table with no edit.
Slide 181 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Edits view shows an overview of the record field edits properties for fields in the
record definition:

Edits view of the PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 8 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Edits Properties (continued)
The Required record field property on the Edits tab determines whether a field must
include data to save a row. At a minimum, mark the following as required:
• Key fields.
• Alternate search key fields.
• Radio buttons.
• Check boxes.
Slide 182 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edits tab to determine various types of validation:
Definition Name Navigation
CURR_DEV_FLAG File, Open
Select Record from the Definition field.
Double click the field.
Select the Edits tab.


Edits properties
Marking a field as required displays an asterisk on the page in the browser.









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 8 7

Configuring Record Field Edits Properties (continued)
To validate field values against a table:
1. Select Table Edit in the Record Field Properties dialog box.
2. Select the type of table validation values.
Slide 183 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edit Type drop-down list box to select a table validation:

Edit Type drop-down list box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 8 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Configuring Record Field Edits Properties (continued)
There are four table edit types:
• Prompt table edit.
• Prompt table no edit.
• Yes/No table edit.
• Translate table edit.
Slide 184 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition shows three of the four edit types:

PSU_STUDENT_TBL record definition
The CUSTOMER_ID field shows a prompt table edit. The EMPHASIS field shows a
translate table edit, and the SAME_ADDR_CUSTOMER field shows a Yes/No table
edit.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 8 9

Configuring Record Field Edits Properties (continued)
When validating against a prompt table:
1. Specify the table edit type.
2. Specify the table where you find the valid values.
Slide 185 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Prompt Table drop-down list box to select a table validation:

Prompt table edit retrieving values from the PSU_TRNLOC_TBL table
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 9 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 23: Examining Record Field Edits Properties
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
1. Examine the Edits display view.
2. Examine the Required check box.
3. Examine translate table edits.
4. Examine Yes/No table edits.
5. Examine Prompt table edits.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, “Creating Record Definitions,” Activity 23:
Examining Record Field Edits Properties.
Slide 186 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9 1

Creating a Record Definition
Before creating a record definition, revisit the technical specifications.
Slide 187 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This table shows the specifications for the T1_COURSE_TBL record definition:
Name Key Srch List Req Edit Prompt Table Default
T1_COURSE Key Y Y Y - - -
EFFDT Key - - Y - - %Date
EFF_STATUS - - - - XLAT - A
DESCR Alt - Y Y - - -
COURSE_TYPE - - - Y XLAT - V
T1_LENGTH_DAYS - - - - - - -
T1_UNITS - - - - - - -
T1_ONSITE - - - Y Y/N - Y
INSTRUCTOR - - - - Prompt PSU_INSTR_TBL -
T1_APP_REL - - - Y XLAT - 8.80
T1_TOOLS_REL - - - Y XLAT - 8.40

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 9 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating a Record Definition (continued)
To create a record definition:
1. Open a new record definition.
2. Insert the necessary fields.
3. Set the record field properties.
4. Save the record definition.
Slide 188 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
See PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Record
Definitions,” Naming Record Definitions
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9 3

Creating a Record Definition (continued)
When you have inserted all of the fields that the specifications indicate, save the record
definition. Depending on the settings, you may have to:
1. Document the record definition.
2. Select the tablespace name.
Slide 189 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 9 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 24: Creating a Record Definition
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create a record definition.
2. Insert field definitions.
3. Configure record field properties.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, “Creating Record Definitions,” Activity 24:
Creating a Record Definition.
Slide 190 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 0 Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9 5

Activity 25: Creating the T1_COURSE_MATL Record Definition
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create a record definition.
2. Insert field definitions.
3. Configure record field properties.
4. Complete the record definition.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 10, "Creating Record Definitions," Activity 25:
Creating the T1_COURSE_MATRL Record Definition.
Slide 191 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Rec o r d De f i n i t i on s L e s s o n 1 0
1 9 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Record definitions are collections of field definitions that serve as templates for the
SQL table.
• There are four record definition displays.
• Record properties include record relationships, audits, and set control properties.
• Record field use properties include key structure, default values, and search
properties.
• Record field edits properties include require fields and table edits.
• Creating new record definitions requires you to set record, record field use, and
record field edits properties.
Slide 192 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9 7
L e s s o n 1 1
Building SQL Tables
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the relationship between record definitions and application data tables.
• Build SQL tables.
• View table indexes.
Slide 194 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
1 9 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the Relationship Between Record Definitions and Application
Data Tables
Once you create the record definitions, you build the database tables, as this diagram
shows:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Build
Tables

Building tables in the data design phase of application development process
Slide 195 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 1 9 9

Describing the Relationship Between Record Definitions and Application
Data Tables (continued)
This illustration shows the three types of tables in a PeopleSoft database:

The three types of tables in a PeopleSoft database
Slide 196 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 0 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the Relationship Between Record Definitions and Application
Data Tables (continued)
Record definitions are a blueprint for generating the SQL to build the application data
tables, as this diagram illustrates:
System
Catalog
Application
Data
People
Tools
Build
Process
Record
Definition
Specifications
Update System
Catalog
with New
Table
Information
PS_<RecDefnName>
Table

The build process in relationship to the three types of tables in a PeopleSoft database
Slide 197 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 0 1

Activity 26: Analyzing PeopleSoft Tables
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Connect to the database.
2. Query PeopleTools tables.
3. Query application data tables.
4. Query system catalog tables.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 11, "Building SQL Tables,” Activity 26:
Analyzing PeopleSoft Tables.
Slide 198 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 0 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building Application Data Tables
The create table process generates an SQL script that uses information from the record
definition to create the database table. This table explains the way that the build process
uses the record definition to create the table:
SQL Script Record Definition Property Application Data Table Property
Drop the table
if it already
exists.
NA NA
Create the
application data
table.
Record definition name
Field names
Field type
Field length
Table name (add PS_ prefix)
Column names
Column type
Column length
Designates
fields as NOT
NULL.
Numeric fields
Character fields
Required fields regardless of data
type
Value = 0 or default from record definition
Value = blank space or default from record
definition
Create indexes Key fields
Alternate search key fields
Fields specified in a custom index
definition
1 per table
1 per alternate search key field
1 per custom index definition

Slide 199 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 0 3

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
This illustration shows the SQL create table process:
System Catalog Tables
SYSOBJECTS
SYSCOLUMNS
Application Data Tables
PS_STUDENT_DATA
PS_CUSTOMER_TBL
People Tools Tables
PSRECDEFN
PSPNLDEFN
SQL Create Table Process
Drop Table if exists
Create Application Data Table
PS_VEHICLE_TBL
Mark Fileds Not Null
Numerics - 0
Character Fields - blank
Reg'd fields - default value from rec defn
Create Indexes
Key(s)
Alternate Search Key(s)
Custom Index(es)

The SQL create table process
Slide 200 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 0 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
To build the table::
1. Open the record that you want to build.
2. Select Build, Current Definition.
3. Set build settings, if necessary.
4. Select build options.
5. Click the Build button.
6. Execute the SQL script, if required.
Slide 201 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 0 5

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
Use the Build dialog box to set:
• Build options
• Build execute options
• Build settings
Slide 202 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Build dialog box to create the SQL table from the record definition:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Build Build, Current Definition


Build dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Building SQL Tables
and Views”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 0 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
Once you have selected a build option, you select build settings. There are three tabs that
you configure when building tables:
• Create
• Logging
• Scripts
Slide 203 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 0 7

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
Select the Build option in the Build dialog boxto:
• Generate the SQL that builds the table.
• Generate a log file.
Slide 204 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The log file displays in the output window:

Log file
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 0 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building Application Data Tables (continued)
To verify results, query the database with the SQL query tool.
Slide 205 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
To verify the table, execute the following queries:
SELECT * FROM PS_T1_COURSE_TBL

sp_help PS_T1_COURSE_TBL

SELECT * FROM sysobjects WHERE name like ‘PS_T1%;’

Note. The sp_help command is a stored procedure that is specific to Microsoft SQL
Server. Consult your DBA or platform documentation for commands appropriate to your
database.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 0 9

Activity 27: Building Application Data Tables
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Start the build process.
2. Change build options.
3. Set build parameters.
4. Generate SQL scripts.
5. Verify the presence of a table.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 11, “Building SQL Tables,” Activity 27:
Building Application Data Tables.
Slide 206 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 1 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Viewing Table Indexes
You generate most indexes when you build the table. However, you must design custom
indexes separately from the record definition. This table explains the indexes that key
fields build:
Record Definition Field Index Name Indexes Created
Key or Duplicate Order Key PS_Recname One per table
Alternate Search Key PSnRecname
n is a number 0 to 9
One per alternate search key
Any field specified in a custom
index definition
PSxRecname
x is a letter A to M
One per custom index definition
Slide 207 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Note these examples of indexes:
• PS_T1_COURSE_TBL is a key index.
• PS0COURSE_TBL is a search key index.
• The table that you created has no custom indexes.
Note. You generate the first two indexes listed in the table when you initially build an
application data table. Developers create custom indexes as necessary.
Table indexes may change over the life of an application data table. You can change the
indexes associated with a table without losing existing rows of data, because indexes are
references to data.

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1 1

Viewing Table Indexes (continued)
By querying the database, you display the indexes.
Slide 208 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
To view an index, execute the following query:
sp_helpindex PS_T1_COURSE_TBL
Note. The sp_helpindex command is a stored procedure that is specific to Microsoft SQL
Server. Consult your DBA or platform documentation for commands appropriate to your
database.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 1 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 28: Viewing Indexes in a Table
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and examine the indexes for the
PS_T1_COURSE_TBL table.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 11, “Building SQL Tables,” Activity 28:
Viewing Indexes in a Table.
Slide 209 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 1 Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1 3

Activity 29: Building the PS_T1_COURSE_MATRL Table
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Build the PS_T1_COURSE_MATL table.
2. Verify the existence of the table in the database.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 11, "Building SQL Tables,” Activity 29:
Building the PS_T1_COURSE_MATRL Table.
Slide 210 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g SQL Ta bl e s L e s s o n 1 1
2 1 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Record definitions are the templates from which the SQL that builds the application
data tables is generated.
• To build an SQL table you must configure the settings such as build and scripting
options.
• You build table indexes automatically when you build the table.
Slide 211 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1 5
L e s s o n 1 2
Creating Page Definitions
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Identify page design principles.
• Identify page and page control properties.
• Add page controls to a page.
• Create page definitions.
• Implement scroll areas and grids.
• Finalize page design and layout.
Slide 213 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 1 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page Design Principles
Defining pages is the first step in the user interface phase of development. As this
diagram illustrates, the data design phase is complete and you are ready to connect the
data to the user:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Components
Register
Components
Define
Pages

Page definition as part of the user interface phase of application development
Slide 214 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1 7

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
You design page definitions that are divided into levels:
• You can build pages with a maximum of four levels, all related in a one-to-many
relationship.
• The levels are numbered from 0 to 3.
Slide 215 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This diagram shows a page with three levels:
Label: NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Label: NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Label: NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN
Label:
Label:
Label:
0
1
2
3
3

Illustration of a PeopleSoft page showing multiple levels
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 1 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
You can create a page with only level 0. This type of page represents a single table in the
database.
Slide 216 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The PeopleSoft Products page shows level 0 only.

Page with a level 0 only
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 1 9

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
You can create a page with two levels, 0 and 1. This can represent data from:
• One table, if that table contains the EFFDT field.
• Two tables.
Slide 217 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Products Transportation page contains a level 0 and a level 1 where both levels are
associated with the same table:

Page with a level 0 and a level 1 that write to the same table
In this example, both levels write to the same table because that table contains the
EFFDT field.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 2 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
The key is selected from the PSU_TRANSPT_TBL table. The data is also written to the
PSU_TRANSPT_TBL table, as shown in this diagram:
PSU_TRNSPT_TBL
Read key from
Level 0
Level 1
Write data to

Process flow when accessing transportation data
Slide 218 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 2 1

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
Usually, level 0 represents the key shared by a parent and child table. Level 1 contains
other key fields and associated data of the child table.
Slide 219 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Products by Customer page contains a level 0 and a level 1. Each level is associated
with a different table:

Page with a level 0 and a level 1 that write to different tables
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 2 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
As the search record, the parent table builds the search page and populates level 0. Any
data that you enter writes to the child table, as illustrated in this diagram:
T1_CUST_TBL
Read key from
Search Record
Level 0
Level 1
T1_CUST_PROD
Primary Record
Write data to

Process flow when accessing customer product data
Slide 220 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 2 3

Identifying Page Design Principles (continued)
Sometimes additional information is necessary on the page, although it may not be in the
base table. You display this information in a related field.
Slide 221 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Products by Customer Customers, Product Information

• Notice the product code.

PeopleSoft Product field without related field
• Notice the description beside the product code.

PeopleSoft Product field with related field
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 2 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties
You view page definition properties in the same manner as any other definition’s
properties: Select File, Definition Properties.
Slide 222 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Page Properties dialog box to set the page type and size:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Page Properties File, Definition Properties


Page Properties dialog box










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 2 5

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
On a page definition, much of your effort focuses on page control properties. There are
four areas of page control properties:
• Use the Record tab to associate a page control to a field on a record definition.
• Use the Label tab to select a label and its appearance for the field.
• Use the Use tab to define how to use the control on the page.
• Use the General tab to specify a name for the page that can be referenced by
PeopleCode.
Slide 223 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 2 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Use the Record tab properties to determine:
• The table and field to which this page control writes.
• The size of the page control.
• Alignment of the page control.
• Other display options.
Slide 224 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edit Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Edit Box Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Record tab.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 2 7

Edit Box Properties dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 2 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Use the Label tab properties to determine:
• Label type.
• Label text.
• Label alignment.
• Label position.
• Other display options.
Slide 225 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edit Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Edit Box Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Label tab










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 2 9

Edit Box Properties dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 3 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Use the Use tab properties to:
• Make the field a display control field.
• Make the field a related field.
• Make the field display only.
• Set the display only appearance.
• Set the processing mode of the field.
Slide 226 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edit Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Edit Box Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Use tab.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3 1

Edit Box Properties dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 3 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Use the General tab properties to:
• Give the page control a name so that you can access it through PeopleCode.
• Make the page control an anchor for a page link.
Slide 227 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Edit Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Edit Box Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the General tab.


Edit Box Properties dialog box









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3 3
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 3 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Drop-down list box properties are slightly different than edit box properties.
Slide 228 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Drop-Down List Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration
options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Drop-Down List Box
Properties
Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Record tab.


Drop-Down List Box Properties dialog box
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3 5

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Radio buttons have slightly different properties than edit boxes. Radio button properties
include a value from the translate table. Assign a value to:
• Choose a value to write to the database.
• Choose a label.
Slide 229 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Radio Button Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Radio Button Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Record tab.


Radio Button Properties dialog box









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 3 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3 7

Identifying Page and Page Control Properties (continued)
Check boxes also have slightly different properties than edit boxes. Check box properties
determine the meaning of the check mark.
Slide 230 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Check Box Properties dialog box to set a variety of configuration options:
Dialog Box Name Navigation
Check Box Properties Edit, Page Field Properties
Click the Record tab.


Check Box Properties dialog box
Note. You have one decision to make on this field type—do you want the selected check
box to represent a Yes or a No value? On this field, when the on value is selected the
value written to the database is Y (for Yes).









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 3 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Page
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 3 9

Activity 30: Identifying Page and Page Control Properties
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
• Observe page properties.
• Observe the page field properties of edit boxes.
• Observe the page field properties of drop-down list boxes.
• Observe the page field properties of radio buttons.
• Observe the page field properties of check boxes.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 30:
Identifying Page and Page Control Properties.
Slide 231 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 4 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Adding Page Controls to a Page
You place page controls on a page. This approximates what users see in a browser. There
are three options for adding page controls to a page definition. You can use:
• A toolbar button.
• A menu command.
• A hot key.
Slide 232 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 4 1

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
Adding page controls to a blank definition begins the page creation process. To add an
edit box page control:
1. Select Insert, Edit Box.
2. Move the cursor to the desired location inside the blank page.
3. Click on the desired location.
Slide 233 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The three types of controls are:
• Aesthetic controls.
• Data entry controls.
• Data processing controls.
Note. To add other page controls, select the desired control from the Insert menu.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 4 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
After you add page controls, you must set the record, label, use, and general properties of
each field. To set the page control properties:
1. Double-click the page control.
2. Set the Record properties.
3. Select each tab, and set the appropriate properties based on the specifications.
Slide 234 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Once the properties of a page control have been set, the term page field is appropriate.
A page field is a page control that you have linked to a specific field in a record
definition.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 4 3

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
You can insert related fields to make the page more informational to the user. Related
fields do this by accessing descriptive data from a different record.
Slide 235 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Student Personal Data (PSU_STUDENT_PERS) page shows this related field:

The Customer field and its related field, Description
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 4 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
This diagram illustrates the two parts to creating a related field:
Step 1
PSU_STUDENT_TBL.CUSTOMER
Step 2
PSU_CUST_TBL.DESCR

Two parts of a related field
Slide 236 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 4 5

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
To configure the display control field:
1. Double-click the primary field.
2. Select the Use tab.
3. Select the Display Control Field check box.
4. Click the OK button.
Slide 237 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Configure the Display Control Field on the Use tab:

Page field use properties for a display control field
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 4 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
To configure the related field:
1. Double-click the related field.
2. Select the correct record and field on the Record tab.
3. Select the Use tab.
4. Select the Related Field check box.
5. Select the appropriate related control field from the drop-down list box.
6. Click the OK button.
Slide 238 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Configure the related field check box on the Use tab:

Page field use properties for a related field controlled by the Curriculum Developer field
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 4 7

Adding Page Controls to a Page (continued)
Some controls, such as the frame, group box, and horizontal rule are for adding visual
elements to the page.
Slide 239 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the frame and group box in this illustration:

A page definition with aesthetic page controls in place
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 4 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 31: Adding Page Controls to a Page
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Add page controls.
• Set edit box properties.
• Set drop-down list box properties.
• Set check box properties.
• Set radio button properties.
• Clean up the page.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 31: Adding
Page Controls to a Page.
Slide 240 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 4 9

Creating Page Definitions
It is now time to create a new page definition for the T1_COURSE component. This
section discusses how to:
• Examine the technical specifications for the page definition.
• Create a new page definition and place page controls on it.
• Place page controls at the proper levels.
• Set page field properties.
• Create related fields.
• Set up radio buttons.
Slide 241 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 5 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
Specifications normally include a drawing of the page that you plan to construct. In this
case, you start with a look at the completed page in the browser.
Slide 242 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Course page will look like this screen shot:

The completed Course page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5 1

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
There is a simple way to create a page using the record definition in the project
workspace: Drag the record definition from the records folder onto the blank page.
Slide 243 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Drag the record icon onto the page:

New page showing project workspace
The record will expand to show all fields:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 5 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

New page definition after you drag the record definition to the page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5 3

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
When you drag a record definition onto a page, most page properties are set by default.
Most pages, however, require a few adjustments such as labels and positioning.
Slide 244 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the position of the labels:

Page showing correct labels in appropriate positions
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 5 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
On the Course page, the search key is in the Course Code field. It writes to the high level
key of the primary table. Key values are rarely editable on a page and must be display
only.
Slide 245 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5 5

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
You must create any related fields specified in the documentation. This diagram shows
the source of the related fields:
COURSE
EFFDT
EFF_STATUS
DESCR
COURSE_TYPE
LENGTH_DAYS
TRAINING_UNITS
ONSITE
INSTRUCTOR
APP_REL
TOOLS_REL
T1_COURSE_TBL
INSTRUCTOR
EFFDT
EFF_STATUS
DESCR
BUSINESS_UNIT
LAST_NAME
FIRST_NAME
CURR_DEV_FLAG
COURSE_TYPE
FACILITY
PSIMAGEVER
PHOTO
PSU_INSTR_TBL

Entity relationship diagram showing the source of the Instructor field
Slide 246 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 5 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
The instructor field has two related fields to display first and last names.
Slide 247 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the two related fields:

Curriculum Developer field with two related fields
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5 7

Creating Page Definitions (continued)
You must configure and group all of the radio buttons on a page.
Slide 248 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Surround the radio buttons with a group box:

Radio buttons in a group box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 5 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 32: Creating Page Definitions
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Create a new page definition and place page controls.
• Set page control properties.
• Create related fields.
• Set up radio buttons.
• Set page field properties.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 32:
Building Pages.
Slide 249 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 5 9

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids
Scroll areas and grids divide a page into levels, creating a one-to-many relationship. This
section discusses:
• Placing scroll areas on a page.
• Placing grids on a page.
• Scroll area and grid properties.
Slide 250 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Customer Table page has a level 0 only:

Example of a page with only level 0
The Products by Customer page has a scroll area that divides the page into a level 0 and a
level 1:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 6 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Example of a page with level 0 and level 1
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 6 1

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
To create a scroll area, select the scroll area tool and drag it around the fields to be
enclosed in the scroll area.
Slide 251 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice that the scroll area surrounds a group of fields:

Page showing a scroll area
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 6 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
Like scroll areas, grids also group fields into levels of data on a page, but they differ from
scroll areas in a number of ways:
Scroll Area Attributes Grid Attributes
Fields can be freely arranged. Fields are arranged in rows.
Data cannot be sorted by field. Data can be sorted by field (column).
Data cannot be downloaded to a spreadsheet. Data can be downloaded to a spreadsheet.
Slide 252 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 6 3

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
Scroll areas group levels of data on a page:
• You can freely arrange fields within the scroll area.
• You can show multiple instances of data on a page.
Slide 253 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The Education scroll area shows multiple rows of data.

An example of a scroll area showing two rows of data
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 6 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
Grids also group levels of data on a page, but their layout is less flexible; and as the name
implies, grids are displayed as rows and columns of data.
Slide 254 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
A grid shows multiple rows of data:

An example of a grid with multiple rows of data
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 6 5

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
To create a grid, you insert a grid and then drag the fields into it. You can drag the fields
in either direction to place them as necessary.
Slide 255 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Drag a field from the appropriate record into the grid:

Dragging a field into a grid
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 6 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
After they are inserted, you must configure the properties of a scroll area or the grid.
They are very similar.
Slide 256 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
A scroll area has General, Label and Use properties:

Scroll Area Properties dialog box
A grid has General, Label, and Use properties:

Grid Properties dialog box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 6 7

Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids (continued)
Although the page is visually correct, it is the page order, not the page layout, which
determines tabbing sequence or flow from field to field.
Click the Order tab to see the page order.
Slide 257 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Order tab to verify processing order of the page:

The Order tab
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 6 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 33: Implementing Scroll Areas
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Insert a scroll area.
• Ensure proper page order.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 33:
Implementing Scroll Areas.
Slide 258 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 6 9

Activity 34: Implementing Scroll Areas and Grids
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
• Examine the page in the browser.
• Examine the scroll area on the page definition.
• Create a grid.
• View the results.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 34:
Implementing Grids and Scroll Areas.
Slide 259 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 7 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finalizing Page Design and Layout
Here are a few tools that help you create clean pages from the beginning. This section
discusses:
• Page size properties.
• Page control inspector.
• Alignment tools.
• Page preview feature.
Slide 260 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7 1

Finalizing Page Design and Layout (continued)
The only page property setting that is changed in PeopleTools I is page size. Select File,
Definition Properties, and then select a predefined or custom page size.
Slide 261 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 7 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finalizing Page Design and Layout (continued)
There is a basic HTML compiler to preview the page in a browser. Select Layout, View
in Browser, and then select the appropriate browser. You can even add browsers to this
list.
Slide 262 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7 3

Finalizing Page Design and Layout (continued)
The page control inspector is a floating window that contains a list of properties of the
selected control. Select View, Show Page Control Inspector to access this feature.
Slide 263 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The page control inspector makes it easier to align page controls:

Page control inspector
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 7 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Finalizing Page Design and Layout (continued)
Use the alignment tools to quickly line fields up with one another along the left, right,
top, or bottom margins, or along the center or middle axis. Select Layout, Align, and then
select the type of alignment that you need.
Slide 264 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7 5

Activity 35: Finalizing Page Design and Layout
In this activity, you will read the activity overview and:
• Modify the page size.
• Use the page preview feature.
• Use the page control inspector.
• Use the alignment tools.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 35:
Adding Final Touches.
Slide 265 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 7 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 36: Building the Course Materials Page
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Insert page controls at level 0.
• Insert page controls at level 1.
• Create a related field.
• Verify the page order.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 12, “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 36:
Building the Course Materials Page.
Slide 266 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 2 Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7 7

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• You must adhere to basic design principles involving page level structure.
• There are a variety of page controls, each with unique properties that you must
configure.
• You place page controls on a page by inserting or dragging and dropping.
• You build pages based on record definitions.
• Grids and scroll areas control data that is associated with a higher level key.
• You can fine-tune page appearance with alignment tools, an HTML compiler, or a
definition inspector.
Slide 267 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Pa g e De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 2
2 7 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 7 9
L e s s o n 1 3
Defining Components
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Identify component definition basics.
• Define General and Use properties.
• Define Internet options for the component.
• Build a new component.
Slide 269 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 8 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics
Defining the component is the sixth development step, as shown in this diagram:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Register
Components
Design
Application
Define
Components

Component definition as part of the user interface phase of application development
Slide 270 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 8 1

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
Component definitions group page definitions. A component can consist of a single page
or a set of pages, but a component is processed as one unit.
Slide 271 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 8 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
You combine component definitions with menu definitions to create a reference point for
the component in the navigation. This combination is also the basis for security access to
the pages on the component, which this diagram shows:

Relationship between component definitions, navigation, and security
Slide 272 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 8 3

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
You must understand search records to develop an application successfully. The two
record types in PeopleSoft applications are:
• Primary record.
• Search record.
Slide 273 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 8 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
In some cases, the primary and search records are identical.
Slide 274 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this search page:
Page Name Navigation
General Information (search
page)
Customers, General Information
Customer Table Customers, General Information

• The search page retrieves information from the PS_T1_CUST_TBL table:

Search page for Customers, General Information
• The primary page for the Customer Table page is also the T1_CUST_TBL:









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 8 5

Customer Table page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Component
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 8 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
In some cases, the primary and search records are different.
Slide 275 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Products Purchased (search
page)
Customers, Products Purchased
Products by Customer Customers, Products Purchased

• The Products Purchased search page searches customers, which are stored in the
customer (T1_CUST_TBL) table.
• The Products by Customer page writes to the customer product (T1_CUST_PROD)
table:

Products by Customer page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Component
Definitions”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 8 7

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
On this component, you use T1_CUST_TBL as the search record for two reasons:
• The search record holds the high-level key for this component.
• This table contains no data to help users find a company if they do not know the
company code.
Slide 276 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 8 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
This diagram shows what happens when you insert data into the Customer Products page:
T1_CUST_TBL
Read key from
Search Record
Level 0
Level 1
T1_CUST_PROD
Primary Record
Write data to

Flow of information from search record to primary record
Slide 277 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 8 9

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
Another basic element of a component is the action:
• You determine the actions that users can take on the pages in the component
definition not in the page definition.
• There are action buttons at the bottom of almost every page in the application.
• The four actions are: Add, Update/Display, History, and Correction.
Slide 278 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this definition:
Definition Name Navigation
T1_CUST_TBL File, Open.
Select Component from the Definition dialog box.
Select File, Definition Properties.
Click the Use tab.

• Notice the action options in the component.

Actions
• These four buttons show the actions users can take:

The four action buttons
Note. Notice that the action buttons on the page display different text than is seen in the
component.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 9 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying Component Definition Basics (continued)
This table explains that the way you configure the component definition determines the
buttons that appear at the bottom of the page:
Button Component Property Function
Add Add Adds a new high-level key. Use only if the search
record and primary record are the same. Limit the
addition of new high-level keys to base tables.
Update/Display Update/Display Enables viewing of data at all levels and inserting
of new rows at levels below zero.
Include History Update/Display All Enables viewing of current and history rows. You
can insert new rows if the effective date of new
rows is later than that of the current row. You can
insert and update future rows. Used on effective-
dated records only.
Correct History Correction Enables editing of data for all rows. Used on
effective-dated records only
Slide 279 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Note. Remember that you grant all possible actions. You will restrict actions later
through security features.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9 1

Activity 37: Identifying Component Definition Basics
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Examine the T1_CUST component.
• Examine the T1_CUST_PROD component.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 13 “Creating Page Definitions,” Activity 37:
Identifying Component Definition Basics.
Slide 280 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 9 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Defining General and Use Properties
When you open a component definition, you see the pages that are attached to that
component on the Definition tab.
Slide 281 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9 3

Defining General and Use Properties (continued)
The Structure tab on a component definition provides information about page levels and
component records and their roles. You also place PeopleCode here.
Slide 282 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 9 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Defining General and Use Properties (continued)
You configure a component by using its Component Properties dialog box. There are
three available types of properties noted by their tabs:
• Use the General tab to configure descriptive information about the component.
• Use the Use tab to set up the search and action properties.
• Use the Internet tab to set up display options for the browser.
Slide 283 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9 5

Defining General and Use Properties (continued)
You must configure at least two areas on the Use tab.
Slide 284 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
You must configure the search record and the actions for a component:

Component Properties dialog box
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 9 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Defining Internet Properties
You configure many property settings for component definitions on the Internet tab of the
Component Properties dialog box. This section discusses:
• Search page options.
• Page navigation and processing modes.
• Toolbar selections.
Slide 285 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9 7

Defining Internet Properties (continued)
You can configure how the search page appears when a user selects a content reference.
Slide 286 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
2 9 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Defining Internet Properties (continued)
You configure multi-page navigation with:
• Tabs at the top of each page in a component.
• Links at the bottom of the component.
Slide 287 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the folder tabs at the top of the page and the links at the bottom of the page:

Multipage navigation options
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 2 9 9

Defining Internet Properties (continued)
Using this dialog box, you also configure:
• Processing mode options.
• Toolbar options.
• Pagebar options.
Slide 288 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
3 0 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building New Components
Review the technical specifications for the T1_COURSE component, as shown in this
table:
Component Element Value or Setting
Pages T1_COURSE
Page labels General Information
Search record T1_COURSE_TBL
Actions Add
Update/Display
Update/Display All
Correction
Default search mode Advanced
Default search action Update/Display
Toolbar buttons Save Add
Return to List Update/Display
Next in List Update/Display All
Previous in List Correction
Slide 289 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 0 1

Building New Components (continued)
After you review the specifications, you will create a component, place the page in it, and
enter the item label. To create a component:
1. Select File, New.
2. Select Component from the New Definition dialog box.
3. Drag the desired page from the project workspace into the component.
4. Double-click in the Item Label field.
5. Enter the name of the page in title case in this field.
Slide 290 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
3 0 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Building New Components (continued)
Next, you must set the component use properties. You will:
1. Set the search record.
2. Set the actions.
Slide 291 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 0 3

Building New Components (continued)
Set the component Internet properties and save the component. You will:
1. Set the search page options.
2. Set the page navigation and processing modes.
3. Set the toolbar options.
Slide 292 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
3 0 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 38: Building a Component Definition
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Add pages to a new component definition.
• Set component use properties.
• Set component internet properties.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 13, “Defining Components,” Activity 38:
Building a Component Definition.
Slide 293 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 3 De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 0 5

Activity 39: Building the T1_COURSE_MATL Component
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Examine the technical specifications.
• Add pages to a new component definition.
• Set component use properties.
• Set component internet properties.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 13, “Defining Components,” Activity 39:
Building the T1_COURSE_MATL Component.
Slide 294 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
De f i n i n g Comp o ne n t s L e s s o n 1 3
3 0 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• The basic elements of a component are the pages, the labels, the properties, and the
structure.
• The search record and the actions are required use properties.
• Internet properties determine the appearance of the search page and other pages in the
component.
• You can build a component by dragging pages from the project workspace and
setting use and internet properties.
Slide 295 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 0 7
L e s s o n 1 4
Registering Components
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain component registration.
• Examine menu definitions.
• Identify elements of PeopleSoft security.
• Navigate the portal registry.
• Plan component registration.
• Register a component.
Slide 297 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
To display your development efforts in a browser, you register the component.
You register components with the Registration Wizard. The wizard gathers information,
then attaches the component to a menu, assigns a permission list to allow security access
rights, and places a content reference entry in the portal registry, exposing the component
in the user navigation.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 0 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Explaining Component Registration
Registering the component is the final step in the user interface phase, as this diagram
illustrates:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

Registering components in the user interface phase of application development
Slide 298 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 0 9

Explaining Component Registration (continued)
The Registration Wizard performs three tasks:
• Attaches a component definition to a menu definition
• Assigns access rights through security.
• Assigns navigation rights through the portal registry.
Slide 299 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 1 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Examining Menu Definitions
To understand the basics of menu definitions, you need to understand how menu
definitions are used in PeopleTools 8.4:
• Menu definitions are containers for components.
• For the security or navigation setup to recognize a component definition, it must be in
a menu.
Slide 300 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1 1

Examining Menu Definitions (continued)
There are two important elements in a menu definition:
• Bar items, which compartmentalize the menu.
• Menu items, which are links to components.
Slide 301 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 1 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Examining Menu Definitions (continued)
The Registration Wizard links the component to the menu definition. However, to make
the connection manually, rather than using the wizard:
1. Open the menu definition.
2. Double-click the bar item
3. Drag the component definition to the empty spot at the bottom of the menu item list.
4. Save the menu definition.
Slide 302 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1 3

Activity 40: Examining Menu Definitions
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and examine a menu definition.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 14, “Registering the Component,” Activity 40:
Examining Menu Definitions.
Slide 303 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 1 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics
You design application security around three elements:
• Permission lists
• Roles
• User IDs
Slide 304 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1 5

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
This diagram shows a partial map of the security plan for the PSU Training application:
PSU1100
Course
Administration
PSU 3000
PSU
Purchasing
PSU1500
Student
Evaluation
PSU1525
Instructor
Evaluation
PSU2000
Course
Delivery
Student Instructor
Training
Administrator
Application
Developer
ALLPAGES
PTTRN
Permission Lists
Roles
User IDs
ENG CFULLER RCASTILLO
JSMITH
JJONES DBORDIER

PSU Training security plan
Slide 305 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Notice the user IDs. If CFULLER signs on to the database, any permissions associated
with the Training Administrator role will be available to her. Likewise, any permissions
associated with the Student role will be available to the user IDs, ENG, JJONES, and
JSMITH.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 1 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
A permission list contains information about component access. Use the permission list
pages to:
• Add Menu definitions to the permission list.
• Edit the components that the user accesses.
• Edit the page in the component that the user accesses.
• Edit the actions in the component that the user accesses.
Slide 306 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Pages page to insert a menu definition:
Page Name Navigation
Permission List PSU1300 PeopleTools, Security, Permissions & Roles, Permission Lists


Pages page
Use the Edit Components link on the Pages page to grant specific component, page, and
action rights.
Note. You insert a menu in the grid. Unless you have previously attached a component to
a menu, you cannot grant access to that component.
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Security Administration, “Working with Permission
Lists”










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1 7

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
To configure access at the page definition level:
1. Insert a menu definition.
2. Click the Edit Components link.
3. Select the desired component and click the associated Edit Pages link.
4. Select the desired pages and actions.
Slide 307 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 1 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
Roles generally have names that describe a job or function. To manually configure a role:
1. Select the Permission Lists page.
2. Insert the permission list that you want to access.
3. Save the role.
Slide 308 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Permission Lists page to assign permission lists to roles:
Page Name Navigation
Permission Lists PeopleTools, Security, Permissions & Roles, Roles


Permission Lists page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Security Administration, “Working with Roles”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 1 9

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
You use user IDs to sign on. During this class, you have been signing on as user
PTOOLS1. The security access for this user is determined by:
• The roles attached to the PTOOLS1 userID.
• The permission lists attached to those roles.
Slide 309 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 2 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics (continued)
You assign roles to user IDs on the Roles page.
Slide 310 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Roles page to assign roles to a user ID:
Page Name Navigation
Roles PeopleTools, Security, Permissions & Roles, Roles


Roles page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Security Administration, “Working with User Profiles”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 2 1

Activity 41: Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Examine roles.
2. Examine permissions.
3. Sign in as a different user.
4. Record your findings.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 14, “Registering the Component,” Activity 41:
Identifying PeopleSoft Security Basics.
Slide 311 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 2 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating the Portal Registry
The structure and content pages consist of three sections:
• Use the breadcrumbs section to indicate the level at which you are working.
• Use the folders scroll area to create and modify folders.
• Use the content references scroll area to create and modify content references.
Slide 312 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
Structure and Content PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content

• Use the Structure and Content page to create and alter the navigational hierarchy:
Breadcrumbs
Folders
Content References

Breadcrumbs, folders, and content references in the Structure and Content page.
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Working with the Registry and
URLs”









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 2 3
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Implementing Portals”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 2 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating the Portal Registry (continued)
The Registration Wizard configures the portal registry. The Registration Wizard:
• Creates a content reference and configures its properties.
• Places the content reference in an existing folder.
Slide 313 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 2 5

Navigating the Portal Registry (continued)
Although the Registration Wizard creates content references for you, you can create a
content reference manually. To create a content reference manually:
1. Navigate to the Structure and Content component.
2. Create a new content reference in a folder.
3. Enter properties for the content reference.
Slide 314 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Properties of a content reference include:
• Name.
• Label.
• Long description.
• Sequence number.
• Menu and component names.
In addition, you can effective-date content references.
Note. This topic is covered in detail in the PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal Administration
course.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 2 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 42: Navigating the Portal Registry
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Examine breadcrumbs.
2. Examine folders.
3. Examine content references.
4. Examine the menu pagelet navigation.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 14, “Registering the Component,” Activity 42:
Navigating the Portal Registry.
Slide 315 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 2 7

Planning Component Registration
The most difficult part of the registration process is planning your needs before you start
the wizard. Examine your detailed technical specifications closely before running the
Registration Wizard and entering values.
Slide 316 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 2 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Planning Component Registration (continued)
Menu definitions no longer generate the user interface. You select the menu definition for
your component based on a few simple rules:
• Avoid using menu definitions delivered with PeopleSoft applications.
• Create menu definitions that make sense as containers for objects, without concern
for navigation.
• Consider using menu bar items for organizational purposes.
Slide 317 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 2 9

Planning Component Registration (continued)
Associating permission lists with components is the security administrator’s job. You
might be playing this role eventually, but it’s not part of the development process.
Slide 318 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 3 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Planning Component Registration (continued)
Before beginning development, you should document, in the technical specifications, the
folder where you place content references. You need to know two things about the
Registration Wizard:
• You must know the name of the folder.
• You cannot browse through the portal structure from the Registration Wizard.
Slide 319 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3 1

Planning Component Registration (continued)
The label is what the user sees in the navigation. Label characteristics include:
• Labels are limited to 30 characters.
• Label text should clearly indicate the purpose of the underlying component.
• Subordinate labels should not repeat higher-level folder information.
Slide 320 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 3 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Planning Component Registration (continued)
Characteristics of the description include:
• The content reference description is a text string of up to 255 characters.
• The text appears in the interface when users point the mouse over a content reference
• Use this description to expand on the description in the label.
Slide 321 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3 3

Registering the Component
The Registration Wizard automates the manual process that you have just seen. However,
you begin the automatic process as you would the manual process. Start with a glance at
the technical specifications. This table shows the specifications for menu information:
Property Value or Status
Menu definition 0400_PTOOLS1
Bar item STUDENT
Slide 322 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 3 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Registering the Component (continued)
This table shows the specifications for navigational information:
Property Value or Status
Portal registry folder T1_COURSES
Content reference label Course Details
Content reference long description Create, view, or edit details about PSU courses
Sequence 10
Slide 323 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3 5

Registering the Component (continued)
This table shows the specifications for security information:
Property Value or Status
Permission List CPPT0400
Add Action Selected
Update/Display Action Selected
Update/Display All Action Selected
Correction Action Selected
Slide 324 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 3 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Registering the Component (continued)
This table shows the specifications for project information:
Property Value or Status
Menu Selected
Registry entry Selected
Permission list Selected
Slide 325 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
When you finish registering a component, many of the properties that you entered are
saved and will appear as defaults when you register the next component.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3 7

Activity 43: Registering the Component
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Open the Registration Wizard.
2. Select the menu definition.
3. Configure the content reference.
4. Assign the permission list.
5. Add project options.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 14, “Registering the Component,” Activity 43:
Registering the Component.
Slide 326 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 3 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 44: Registering the T1_COURSE_MATL Component
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Open the Registration Wizard.
2. Select the menu definition.
3. Configure the content reference.
4. Assign the permission list.
5. Add project options.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 14, “Registering Components,” Activity 44:
Registering the T1_COURSE_MATL Component.
Slide 327 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 4 Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 3 9

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Component registration consists of placing a component on a menu, configuring the
content reference properties, and establishing security.
• Menu definitions are component repositories, not navigational structures.
• PeopleSoft security is based on permission lists, roles, and user IDs.
• You can enter and configure content references through the browser, by selecting
PeopleTools, Portal, Structure & Content.
• Before you run the Registration Wizard, analyze the tasks that it performs and have a
project plan with you during the registration process.
• The Registration Wizard saves development time by attaching components to menu
definitions, creating content references in the portal registry, and assigning a
permission list to the component and the content reference.
Slide 328 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Re g i s t e r i n g Comp o n e n t s L e s s o n 1 4
3 4 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 4 1
L e s s o n 1 5
Testing an Application
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create and analyze test plans.
• Test applications.
• Troubleshoot common issues.
Slide 330 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Before releasing new or modified applications, you must perform a rigorous test to ensure
online functionality and data integrity. You test your new application by:
• Adding, deleting, and modifying data.
• Confirming default values and prompt lists.
• Examining application data.
• Using the DBMS query tool to verify data in the database.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 4 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating and Analyzing Test Plans
The fourth phase is composed of one step, as illustrated in the following diagram. If you
find problems, you move back to the appropriate step to resolve it, and walk through the
testing process again until you are ready to go to production.
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Design
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Test
Application

The testing phase of application development
Slide 331 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 4 3

Creating and Analyzing Test Plans (continued)
Before you start, however, be aware of dependencies the application might have on other
tables in the database. You are especially interested in search record dependencies.
Slide 332 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 4 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating and Analyzing Test Plans (continued)
The specification calls for default values on certain fields. These default values were
determined at the record definition level. During testing, confirm the presence of the
defaults values as you add or insert rows.
Slide 334 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Definition Name Navigation
T1_COURSE_TBL File, Open
Select Record from the Definition drop-down list box.

• Use the record definition to determine default values:

T1_COURSE_TBL record definition
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 4 5

Creating and Analyzing Test Plans (continued)
You configured three types of prompts for data validation in this record definition. The
test plan should include:
• Testing translate table prompts.
• Testing yes/no prompts.
• Testing prompt table prompts.
Slide 335 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the following navigation path to access this page:
Page Name Navigation
T1_COURSE_TBL File, Open
Select Record from the Definition drop-down list box.

• Use the record definition to examine prompts:

T1_COURSE_TBL record definition
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 4 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating and Analyzing Test Plans (continued)
Tableset sharing is a form of data validation where users are limited to certain choices
based on the business rules that were set up for the prompt tables. If your component
includes tableset sharing, you must:
• Determine the rules.
• Document the expected behavior of the affected prompts.
Slide 336 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 4 7

Activity 45: Creating and Analyzing Test Plans
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and formulate a test plan.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 15, “Testing an Application,” Activity 45:
Creating and Analyzing Test Plans.
Slide 337 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 4 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Testing Applications
Because the T1_COURSE component uses the same record for both search and primary,
you expect the PS_T1_COURSE_TBL table to be empty. Therefore, this test includes:
• Adding high-level keys.
• Inserting rows.
• Checking default values.
• Verifying data validation prompts.
• Testing effective-dated logic.
Slide 338 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 4 9

Activity 46: Testing Applications
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Check for data dependencies.
• Add high-level keys.
• Insert rows.
• Check default values.
• Verify data validation prompts.
• Test effective-dating logic.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 15, “Testing an Application,” Activity 46:
Testing Applications.
Slide 339 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 5 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Troubleshooting Common Issues
Here are some issues that you may find during testing. This chart describes issues that
result from mistakes in a field definition:
Problem Configuration Option
Drop-down list boxes or radio buttons don’t include
all required values.
In the field definition, open the properties dialog box
and select the Translate Values tab.
Check the effective date of translate value.
Field label is incorrect. Check the label IDs in the field, record, and page
definitions.
Data entered is in the wrong format (all uppercase or
mixed case).
Check the format in the field definition. Use caution;
a change here can affect many areas of the
application.
Not enough characters are allowed in a field. Check the length in the field definition. Use caution;
a change here can affect many areas of the
application.
Slide 340 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5 1

Troubleshooting Common Issues (continued)
This chart describes issues that result from mistakes in a record definition:
Problem Configuration Option
Duplicate key error messages Check the key structure. If you make changes
remember to rebuild (or alter) the table or recreate
indexes.
Search page not correct Check the key, alternate search key, and list box
settings of the search record.
Default values missing or incorrect Check record field use properties.
Prompt not available or prompting to wrong table Check record field edits properties.
Slide 341 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 5 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Troubleshooting Common Issues (continued)
This chart describes issues that result from mistakes in creating the SQL table:
Problem Configuration Option
SQL errors when accessing search page or
component
Verify that the table exists. Determine whether
someone modified the record definition but did not
alter the underlying table. Build or alter from record
if required.
Slide 342 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5 3

Troubleshooting Common Issues (continued)
This chart describes issues that result from mistakes in a page definition:
Problem Configuration Option
High-level key can be edited. Check page field properties for display-only setting.
Alignment of controls on the screen is off. Check page definition.
There is no data in a related field. Check the page field properties for control and
related field settings, plus the field settings for the
related field. It should be pointed to a field in the
prompt table.
Label text is incorrect. Check page field properties.
Slide 343 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 5 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Troubleshooting Common Issues (continued)
This chart describes issues that result from mistakes in a component definition:
Problem Configuration Option
Label on page tabs is incorrect. Check the component definition for the Item Label
and Folder Tab Label fields.
You want different defaults for the initial search
page.
Check Component Properties, Internet tab.
Search page shows inappropriate fields. Check Component Properties, Use tab.
Inappropriate actions available to user. Check Component Properties, Use tab.
Incorrect or inappropriate buttons appear on bottom
of display.
Check Component Properties, Internet tab.
Slide 344 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5 5

Troubleshooting Common Issues (continued)
This chart describes issues that result from mistakes in component registration:
Problem Configuration Option
Content reference is not visible. Examine the portal registry for content reference
security. Save the content reference to refresh
permission list associations.
An access error appears when clicking a content
reference.
Examine the permission list and check page security
settings. Examine content reference in portal registry
and verify names of component and menu definition.
Search page title is cryptic text. Open menu definition and edit menu item label.
Inappropriate text appears for content reference label
or description.
Edit content reference in the portal registry.
Slide 345 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 5 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 47: Testing More of the Training Application
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Check for data dependencies.
• Insert rows.
• Check default values.
• Verify data validation prompts.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 15, “Testing the Application,” Activity 47:
Testing More of the Training Application.
Slide 346 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 5 Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5 7

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• It is important to create a test plan that will check for data dependencies, test key
structure, verify default values and validation tables, and examine effective dating
logic.
• After formulating a test plan based on the guidelines above, you implement the plan
by entering data.
• It is important to methodically trace any problems to the definition that is causing it,
and then walk through the remaining steps of development.
Slide 347 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Tes t i ng an Ap p l i c a t i o n L e s s o n 1 5
3 5 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 5 9
L e s s o n 1 6
Editing the Registry Structure
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe content organization in PeopleTools 8.44 navigation.
• Create new folders.
• Move folders or content references to new parent folders.
• Delete folders.
Slide 349 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 6 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
Navigation in enterprise applications based on PeopleTools 8.44:
• Is derived from the contents of the portal registry.
• Has changed significantly from previous PeopleTools releases, in which navigation
was derived from menu definitions.
• Allows for a single navigational taxonomy that spans multiple application databases.
Slide 350 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 6 1

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
When considering what makes up a content reference in the navigation, ask these
questions:
• Which node contains the content?
• Which portal registry are you using?
• Which folder holds the content reference?
• Where does the content reference point?
Slide 351 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 6 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
The answers to the questions depend partly on your license agreement. There are three
license agreement categories:
• PeopleSoft application.
• PeopleSoft application with portal pack.
• PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal.
Slide 352 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 6 3

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
All PeopleSoft applications provide access to application content by navigation and
Verity search. Each application suite maintains its own server processes and database, as
this diagram shows:
Web Server
Application
Server
HRMS Domain
Application
Databases
Home Pages
CRM Domain
HRMS PIA
CRM PIA
CRM
HRMS

PeopleSoft application architecture
Slide 353 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 6 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
Portal packs are aligned by product lines and include pagelets as well as a personalized
homepage with multiple tabs.
This diagram illustrates an application portal:
Web Server
Application
Server
HRMS Domain
Application
Databases
Home Pages
CRM Domain
HRMS PIA
CRM PIA
CRM
CRM
CRM
CRM
HR
HR
HR
HR
HRMS
CRM

PeopleSoft application with portal pack architecture
Slide 354 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 6 5

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal runs on its own database and can aggregate content and
portal packs across multiple PeopleSoft application databases, as well as any other
content that you want to deploy in the portal, as this diagram shows:
Portal
Web Server
Application
Server
HRMS Domain
CRM Domain
CRM
HRMS
Application
Databases
Home Page
Portal Domain
HRMS PIA
CRM PIA
Portal PIA
CRM
HR
CRM
HR
HR

PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal architecture
Slide 355 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 6 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
Navigation standards in previous releases were based on menu bar item names that held
links to content. There were five standard menu bar item names:
• Use
• Inquire
• Setup
• Process
• Report
Slide 356 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 6 7

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
In PeopleTools 8.4, navigation is organized around functional areas and business
processes. This diagram shows a simple example of how you might map a business
process:
Administer a Training Class
T
r
a
i
n
i
n
g
S
e
l
f

S
e
r
v
i
c
e
On-line
Enrollment
Minimum
Threshhold?
Assign
Instructor
Prepare
Classroom
Cancel Class
Deliver
Course
Billing
No
Yes
Course
Evaluation

Pages mapped to tasks in a business process
Slide 357 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 6 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
The top level of folders represents the functional areas. Folders can contain other folders
or content references. This diagram shows how the navigation might look based on a
simple business process:
Enroll in Training
Classroom Assignments
Classroom Preparation
Course Evaluations
Collect Fees
Self Service
Training
Class Administration

Navigation for administering a training class
Slide 358 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 6 9

Discussing Content Organization in PeopleTools 8.44 Navigation
(continued)
Keep in mind these rules as you develop your navigation:
• Aim for a flat taxonomy.
• Users should be able to access a content reference with no more than three clicks
(two folders plus a content reference).
• Long descriptions for content references should be in sentence case without periods.
• Do not repeat a term in a folder and in the content reference.
• The order of content references should match the steps in the business process, where
possible.
• Limit the contents of a folder to 14 folders and content references combined.
Slide 359 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 7 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 48: Examining the Portal Registry
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Examine the default node.
2. Examine the default portal.
3. Examine folder configuration settings.
4. Examine content reference configuration settings.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 16, “Editing the Registry Structure,” Activity
48: Examining the Portal Registry.
Slide 360 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7 1

Creating Folders
You must create a folder before running the registration wizard. This section discusses
how to:
• Name folders.
• Create new folders.
• Verify that folders appear in navigation.
Slide 361 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 7 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Folders (continued)
Follow these guidelines when naming new folders:
• Each folder in the portal registry must have a unique name.
• A folder name can be up to 30 characters long.
• Use a naming convention to help you identify new folders.
• You might want to include in the name a clue to the location of the folder.
Slide 362 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7 3

Creating Folders (continued)
To create a folder in the portal registry:
1. Select PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content.
2. Select the Add Folder link.
3. Enter the appropriate text in the Folder Administration page.
4. Click Save.
Slide 363 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 7 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Folders (continued)
Once you create the folder, you will need to verify the folder’s existence. To verify a
folder’s existence:
1. Click the Refresh button on the browser.
2. Click the folder to view its contents.
Slide 364 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7 5

Activity 49: Creating Folders in the Portal Registry
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create a folder.
2. Verify that the folder appears in the taxonomy.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 16, “Editing the Registry Structure,” Activity
49: Creating Folders in the Portal Registry.
Slide 365 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 7 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Moving Folders or Content References to New Parent Folders
A folder can contain a number of content references and folders, and those folders
usually have more content references. When you move a folder, you graft it like the
branch of a tree to a new location. All subordinate content moves with it, like the twigs
and leaves of a tree.
Slide 366 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7 7

Moving Folders or Content References to New Parent Folders (continued)
To move a folder and its subordinate content to a new location in the navigation:
1. Select PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content.
2. Select a folder.
3. Click the Edit link to move the folder that is beside the link
4. Click the Select New Parent Folder button.
5. Navigate to the new folder and click the folder name.
Slide 367 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 7 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 50: Moving Folders or Content References
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Move folders.
2. Verify that folders appear in the navigation.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 16, “Editing the Registry Structure” Activity
50: Moving Folders or Content References.
Slide 368 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 7 9

Deleting Folders
Before deleting a folder, you must assess the impact of deletion, because:
• Deleting a folder deletes everything in it.
• There is no undo option.
Slide 369 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 8 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Deleting Folders (continued)
If you no longer need a folder and you have minimized the impact, you should delete it
from the portal registry. To delete a folder:
1. Click the Delete button for the desired folder.
2. Click OK in the warning dialog box.
3. Click the Save button.
Slide 370 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 8 1

Activity 51: Deleting Folders in the Portal Registry
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Delete the My Test folder from the portal registry.
2. Verify that the My Test folder was deleted.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 16, “Editing the Registry Structure,” Activity
51: Deleting Folders in the Portal Registry.
Slide 371 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 8 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 52: Working with Folders in the Portal Registry
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create a folder.
2. Move a content reference.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 16, “Editing the Registry Structure,” Activity
52: Working with Folders in the Portal Registry.
Slide 372 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 6 Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 8 3

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• You organize all user-accessible content in the portal registry by using functional
areas and business processes as guidelines for constructing user navigation.
• New folders are created in the Structure and Content component of the portal
registry.
• You can move existing folders, along with their content, to other areas of the
taxonomy.
• Deleting a folder or content reference from the portal registry is a quick process but
can have broad consequences.
Slide 373 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Ed i t i n g t he Re g i s t r y St r uc t u r e L e s s o n 1 6
3 8 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 8 5
L e s s o n 1 7
Creating Menu Definitions
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the purpose of a menu.
• Locate a component on a menu.
• Edit menu item labels.
• Create menu definitions.
Slide 375 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 8 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the Purpose of a Menu
The term menu implies user navigation. As of PeopleTools 8.4, however, menu
definitions no longer generate navigation. Instead, menus:
• Are placeholders for components.
• Create logical groupings for security.
• Establish a link to the portal registry.
Slide 376 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 8 7

Describing the Purpose of a Menu (continued)
Menu definitions consist of three elements:
• Menu name
• Bar item name
• Menu item
Slide 377 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 8 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Locating a Component on a Menu
The registration wizard places a component on a menu. If you do not remember with
which menu you associated a specific component:
1. Navigate to the component.
2. Press CTRL+J.
Slide 378 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Press CTRL+J to see definition names:

Definition names
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 8 9

Locating a Component on a Menu (continued)
When you know the name of the menu and the component, you open them in the
PeopleSoft Application Designer.
Slide 379 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 9 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Editing Menu Item Labels
When you select a content reference, a search page loads. Every search page has a title.
The title should match the content reference to maintain consistency in the look of the
application.
Slide 380 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9 1

Editing Menu Item Labels (continued)
When you register a component, the search page titles do not match the content reference
labels, as is the case for the Course Details and the Course Materials components that you
created in class.
Slide 381 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This diagram shows a search page title and a menu item label:

Search page title
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 9 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Editing Menu Item Labels (continued)
To change menu item labels:
1. Open the menu definition.
2. Select the bar item under which the menu item resides.
3. Double-click the menu item.
4. Enter the new label.
5. Save the menu definition.
Slide 382 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9 3

Activity 53: Editing Menu Item Labels
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and change menu item labels.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 17, “Creating Menu Definitions, Activity 53:
Editing Menu Item Labels.
Slide 383 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 9 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Menu Definitions
PeopleSoft applications have many existing menu definitions. When developing, you
must determine whether to:
• Use an existing definition.
• Create a new one.
Slide 384 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9 5

Creating Menu Definitions (continued)
You create menu definitions in the same as any other definition in PeopleSoft
Application Designer. To create a menu definition:
1. Select File, New.
2. Select Menu from the New Definition dialog box.
3. Click the OK button.
4. Select the Standard menu type radio button.
5. Click the OK button.
Slide 385 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 9 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Menu Definitions (continued)
After selecting a new menu definition, you add bar items to the new menu. To add a bar
item to the menu:
1. Double-click the empty rectangle with dashed lines.
2. Enter a name that is unique to this menu.
3. Enter a label.
Slide 386 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9 7

Creating Menu Definitions (continued)
To save a menu definition you must include at least one bar item and at least one menu
item. The easiest solution is to place a separator bar as a menu item under the bar item
itself. Otherwise, to configure a menu item:
1. Double-click the empty rectangle with dashed lines under the new bar item.
2. Select Component radio button from the Type field.
3. Click the OK button.
4. Select File, Save.
5. Enter data in the Save As field.
6. Click the OK button.
Slide 387 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
3 9 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 54: Creating a Menu Definition
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create a menu definition.
2. Add a bar item.
3. Add a separator bar to the menu item.
4. Save a menu definition.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 17, “Creating Menu Definitions,” Activity 54:
Creating a Menu Definition.
Slide 388 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 7 Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 3 9 9

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Menu definitions were used to construct user navigation in previous PeopleSoft
releases, but in PeopleTools 8.4, menu definitions act as containers for components,
providing links to security and the portal registry.
• Developers should open the menu definition and edit the item label to match the
content reference label.
• You should create at least one menu definition to hold custom components; this will
save you from having to reregister components when you upgrade your application.
• Creating a menu definition is a four-step process.
Slide 389 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Cr e at i n g Me n u De f i n i t i o ns L e s s o n 1 7
4 0 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 0 1
L e s s o n 1 8
Analyzing the Impact of Design
Changes
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Determine relationships among definitions.
• Synchronize record definitions and database tables.
• Incorporate upgrades in the development strategy.
Slide 391 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 0 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Determining Relationships Among Definitions
If you determine that new configurations are necessary, try to keep specialized
configurations to a minimum. This way you can:
• Implement the application more quickly.
• Upgrade smoothly.
Slide 392 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 0 3

Determining Relationships Among Definitions (continued)
You design definitions before you develop applications. This diagram shows the
relationship among application definitions:
Page
Field
Field
Field
Field Record
Table

Relationship among application definitions
Slide 393 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 0 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Determining Relationships Among Definitions (continued)
To determine the definitions that are affected by a change to an existing definition, you
can:
• Use the PeopleSoft Application Designer Find Definition References tool.
• Use the PeopleTools Cross Reference page.
Slide 394 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 0 5

Activity 55: Determining Relationships Among Definitions
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Find definition references.
2. Using the Record Cross Reference page.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 18, “Analyzing the Impact of Design
Changes,” Activity 55: Determining Relationships Among Definitions.
Slide 395 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 0 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables
Data is stored in SQL tables, which are based on record definitions. Changes to field
definitions or record definitions often make the underlying table no longer synchronized
with the record definition. To remedy this problem without losing application data, use
the Alter option of the Build operation.
Slide 396 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 0 7

Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables (continued)
If you change either a field definition or a record definition, you might have to alter the
associated SQL table to synchronize it, depending on the changes.
Slide 397 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use this table to determine what actions you must perform when you change a record
definition:
Properties Table Structure Changes
(Create or Alter Table)
Index Changes
(Create Index)
Definition Changes
(Do Nothing)
Field Field name
Length
Type
Delete/Add field from record
definition
NA Format
Long name
Short name
Translate table values
Use NA Key (new)
Alternate search key
Key direction
(ascending or
descending)
Duplicate order key
Search key (if already a
key)
List box item
Defaults (value and page
control)
Auto update
Field audits
Edits Value Required (Long Character,
Date, Time, DateTime, Image)
NA Prompt table edit
Translate table edit
Yes/No edit
Value required (Numeric,
Character)
Reasonable date check
PeopleCode NA NA PeopleCode

______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 0 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables (continued)
If you make a change that requires an update to an index only:
1. Open the record definition.
2. Select Build, Current Definition.
3. Select Create Indexes.
4. Select a build execute option.
5. Click the Build button.
Slide 398 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 0 9

Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables (continued)
If you change the table structure, you must either build or alter the table. The alter table
process is similar to the create table process, except that you do not lose the data that
application data tables contain.
Slide 399 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
It is important to remember that if you alter a table, you must rebuild any views that
reference the altered table. You must also recompile any COBOL programs that reference
the altered table.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 1 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables (continued)
The Alter tab of the Build Settings dialog box provides options for handling existing data.
You can:
• Drop columns even if they hold data.
• Skip records if they contain data.
• Truncate data.
• Set the specific type of alter options that you would like.
Slide 400 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1 1

Activity 56: Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Determine the impact of a definition change and changing the field definition.
2. Change build settings for the T1_COURSE_TBL table and alter the table.
3. Examine the log and script.
4. Examine the page definition.
5. Examine the SQL table.
6. Test the application.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 18, “Analyzing the Impact of Design
Changes,” Activity 56: Synchronizing Record Definitions and Database Tables.
Slide 401 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 1 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy
Every implementation is different, depending on customer requirements, but there are
three main categories:
• The applications are unmodified
• The applications have minor modifications
• The applications are highly modified
Slide 402 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1 3

Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy (continued)
An upgrade is a replacement of existing definitions with new ones. If you have not
altered definitions, upgrading the application is a relatively smooth operation. The
definition upgrades take place without much required interaction.
Slide 403 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 1 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy (continued)
During the upgrade process, if internal version information of a definition indicates that it
has been modified, information about the upgraded definition and the existing modified
one is captured and placed in a comparison report, as illustrated in this diagram:
Field A
Field D
Field C
Field B
Existing Modified
Record Definition
Field A
Field D
Field C
Field B
New Version of
Record Definition
Comparison
Report

Comparison between modified and upgraded definitions
Slide 404 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1 5

Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy (continued)
To comply with the upgrade:
1. Examine the comparison report to determine modifications made to the original
definition.
2. Find the documentation pertaining to your modifications.
3. Accept the upgraded definition, replacing the original.
4. Using the development documentation, reapply the modifications to the upgraded
definition.
Slide 405 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 1 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Incorporating Upgrades in the Development Strategy (continued)
To ensure smooth transitions between releases of PeopleSoft applications, follow two
rules:
• When possible, create a new definition instead of modifying an existing one.
• When you modify an existing definition, document changes fully in the Comments
field of the definition properties.
Slide 406 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 8 An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1 7

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• You can use cross-reference tools to examine how definitions are interrelated.
• Changing definitions can have pronounced effects on other definitions.
• Modifying field and record properties can cause the record definition to be
unsynchronized with the database table.
• When planning application development, you should consider the impact of
modifications on future upgrades.
Slide 407 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
An a l y z i n g t h e I mp a c t of Des i g n Ch a n g e s L e s s o n 1 8
4 1 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 1 9
L e s s o n 1 9
Building Applications
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Discuss application design
• Create data structures
• Create user interfaces
• Test applications
Slide 409 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 2 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Designing an Application
You design the application in the planning phase as the diagram illustrates:
Plan
Define
Fields
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

Planning phase
Slide 410 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
All interested parties should be involved in this phase to avoid costly and time-
consuming mistakes. In the application design phase you produce:
• Functional specifications
• Technical specifications
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 2 1

Activity 57: Designing an Application
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Plan the data structures.
• Plan the user interfaces.
• Plan the testing.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 19, “Building Applications,” Activity 57:
Designing an Application.
Slide 411 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 2 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Data Structures
With technical specifications prepared, you can proceed to the data design phase as this
diagram illustrates:
Plan
Define
Fields
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

Data design phase
Slide 412 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
In this phase, you create the underlying structure of the application. The data design
phase comprises three application development steps:
• Step 2: Define fields.
• Step 3: Create record definitions.
• Step 4: Build SQL tables.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 2 3

Creating Data Structures (continued)
In step 2, you identify and create new field definitions. You set such field properties as:
• Type
• Length
• Label
• Format
• Translate values
Slide 413 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 2 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating Data Structures (continued)
In step 3, you create a record definition. You set such record properties as:
• Default values
• Field level audits
• Key structure
• PeopleCode
• Required fields
• Table edits
Slide 414 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 2 5

Creating Data Structures (continued)
In step 4, you create the SQL tables. You need to configure settings such as:
• Build options
• Execute options
• Script options
• Logging options
Slide 415 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 2 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 58: Creating Data Structures
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Define fields.
2. Create record definitions.
3. Build SQL tables.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 19, “Building Applications,” Activity 58:
Creating Data Structures.
Slide 416 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 2 7

Creating User Interfaces
With the table structures in place, you can proceed to the user interface phase as this
diagram illustrates:
Plan
Define
Fields
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

User interface phase
Slide 417 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The user interface phase comprises three application development steps.
• Step 5: Create page definitions.
• Step 6: Define components.
• Step 7: Register components.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 2 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating User Interfaces (continued)
In step 5, you create page definitions. You set such page properties as:
• Record name
• Field name
• Display options
• Label options
• Related field options
• Page order
• Page size
• Alignment
Slide 418 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 2 9

Creating User Interfaces (continued)
In step 6, you create a component definition. You set such component properties as:
• Search record
• Actions
• Toolbar options
• Internet options
• PeopleCode
Slide 419 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 3 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Creating User Interfaces (continued)
In step 7, you register a component. The Registration Wizard:
• Places the component on a menu.
• Sets up navigation through the portal registry.
• Sets up security rights on one permission list.
Slide 420 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3 1

Activity 59: Creating User Interfaces
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Create page definitions.
2. Create component definitions.
3. Register components.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 19, “Building Applications,” Activity 59:
Creating User Interfaces.
Slide 421 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 3 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Testing Applications
The final phase is also the last application development step as this diagram illustrates:
Plan
Define
Fields
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Design
Application
Test
Application
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components

Testing phase
Slide 422 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Perform a rigorous test on the component by:
• Adding rows of data.
• Verifying defaults and prompts.
• Inserting rows of data.
• Deleting rows of data.
• Modifying rows of data.
• Testing all of the supported actions.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 1 9 Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3 3

Activity 60: Testing the Application
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Test the course enrollment application.
2. Test the course database application.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 19, “Building Applications,” Activity 60:
Testing the Application.
Slide 423 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Bu i l d i n g Ap p l i c a t i o n s L e s s o n 1 9
4 3 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• The application design phase produces functional and technical specifications.
• In the data design phase, you create any fields that you need, organize the fields into
record definitions, and then create the database tables.
• In the user interface phase, you develop pages, create components, grant security
access, and implement navigation.
• You should not release any application without a rigorous and thorough test phase.
Slide 424 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3 5
L e s s o n 2 0
Searching Applications by Using
the Verity Search Engine
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe and perform a Verity search.
• Perform a Verity search.
• Generate a Verity search collection.
• Add keywords to a search collection.
Slide 426 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
All PeopleSoft 8 applications come with the Verity search engine. In the original release
of PeopleSoft 8, this search capability powered PeopleBooks documentation only.
In PeopleTools 8.4, the capabilities of Verity have been expanded to help users navigate
the applications.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 3 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing and Performing a Verity Search
You saw on the first day of this class that users can enter text to search for content. The
search engine is supplied by Verity, one of the largest providers of search engines.
Slide 427 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Security filtering is built in and implemented behind the scenes in a Verity search. The
permission lists assigned to each content reference determine security access.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3 7

Describing and Performing a Verity Search (continued)
In PeopleTools 8.4, users can access the Verity search engine to search within
applications. When a user searches for text Verity examines an index based on the
contents of the portal registry. The contents of the following fields are included in the
index:
• Label
• Long Description
• Author
• Product
• Node Name
• Attributes (keywords)
Slide 428 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 3 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing and Performing a Verity Search (continued)
All of these fields are available in the portal registry on the Content Ref Administration
page.
Slide 429 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Content Ref Administration page to enter information that the Verity search
engine will use:
Page Name Navigation
Content Ref Administration PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content
Click the Courses link.
Click the Edit link for General Information.










FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 3 9

Content Ref Administration page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 4 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing and Performing a Verity Search (continued)
The Verity search engine does not search all the text in the portal registry each time a
user enters a search request. Rather, a search index is generated from the text and stored
on the application server. In the Verity search engine, these indexes are called collections.
PeopleSoft applications support four types of search collections:
• Registry
• Record
• Web
• File system
Slide 430 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
PeopleSoft Enterprise Portal contains processes for building all these collections. For
standalone enterprise applications, only the registry collection is supported.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 4 1

Describing and Performing a Verity Search (continued)
To perform a Verity search:
1. Enter a value in the Search field.
2. Click the search button.
3. Examine the results.
Slide 431 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The search field is at the top of the menu pagelet. The search button is to the right of the
search field.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 4 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 61: Performing a Verity Search
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and execute a Verity search.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 20, “Searching Applications by Using the
Verity Search Engine,” Activity 61: Performing a Verity Search.
Slide 432 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 4 3

Generating a Registry Search Collection
If you add content to the portal registry by registering components, you must generate a
new registry collection before searching text on the new content reference. To generate a
search collection:
1. Select PeopleTools, Portal, Build Registry Search Index.
2. Click the Search button.
3. Click a Run Control ID link from the Search Results.
4. Click the Run button.
5. Select the process.
6. Click the OK button.
Slide 433 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 4 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 62: Generating a Registry Search Collection
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Generate a search collection.
2. Search for content.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 20,“ Searching Applications by Using the
Verity Search Engine,” Activity 62: Generating a Registry Search Collection.
Slide 434 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 4 5

Adding Keywords to a Search Collection
A search collection made up of text from labels and descriptions is helpful, but
occasionally users will want to find content based on words that are not in either field.
This is where keywords are helpful.
Slide 435 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Use the Content Ref Administration page to add keywords:
Page Name Navigation
Content Ref Administration PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content
Click the Courses link.
Click the Edit link for General Information.


Content Ref Administration page
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 4 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Adding Keywords to a Search Collection (continued)
You can enter one or more keywords for a content reference in the Content Reference
Attributes region of the Content Ref Administration page. Follow these guidelines:
• Enter terms that are not in the Label or Description field.
• Enter terms that may be unique to the business process.
Slide 436 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Here is an example of keywords entered for a content reference in a PeopleSoft human
resources application:

Keywords entered in the Content Reference Attributes page
See Also
PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: Internet Technology, “Administering Portals”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 4 7

Adding Keywords to a Search Collection (continued)
To add keywords for a content reference:
1. Enter KEYWORD in the Attribute field of the Content Reference Attributes region of
the Content Ref Administration page.
2. Enter Keyword in the Label field.
3. Enter search words or phrases separated by commas in the Attribute value field.
4. (Optional) Select the Translate check box.
5. Click the Save button.
6. Build the registry index when you finish entering all keywords.
Slide 437 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Select the Translate check box to make attribute values translatable into other languages.
It is a good practice to make keywords translatable.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 4 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 63: Implementing a Verity Search Collection
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Enter keywords.
2. Rebuild the search collection.
3. Search for specific content in the training application.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 20, “Describing the Verity Search Engine,”
Activity 63: Implementing a Verity Search Collection.
Slide 438 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 0 Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 4 9

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• The Verity search engine is a standard feature of all PeopleSoft 8 applications; users
enter text searches that are filtered for security access rights before links to content
are returned.
• You generate a registry search collection through a process that you should run
regularly.
• Keywords are unique, searchable values that enable you to expand the scope of a
Verity search for specific content references.
Slide 439 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Se a r c h i n g Ap p l i c a t i o ns b y Us i n g t h e Ve r i t y Se a r c h En g i n e L e s s o n 2 0
4 5 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5 1
L e s s o n 2 1
Performing Data Audits
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Discuss advantages and disadvantages of implementing audits.
• Implement field-level audits.
• Implement record-level audits.
Slide 441 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
PeopleSoft has two approaches to auditing data: by field and by record definition. In
either case, the system writes data to tables created to contain audit data.
Field-level audits record when you insert, update, or delete a field value. The system
writes a row of audit data to the PSAUDIT table for each field marked for audit. You
may write multiple rows of audit data for a single transaction.
Record-level audits record any inserts, updates, or deletions for specified fields in a row
of data. PeopleSoft does not provide a table to store record-level audit data.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 5 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits
Database administrators perform audits to track the tasks that users perform in PeopleSoft
enterprise applications. You might have hundreds or thousands of people signing in and
altering data in the database. Alterations fall into three categories:
• Adding new rows of data.
• Changing existing rows of data.
• Deleting rows of data.
Slide 442 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5 3

Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits
(continued)
There are advantages of auditing. You can record:
• The values that changed.
• When changes were made.
• Who made the changes.
Slide 443 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This is a valuable tool, especially with sensitive data. You might set up auditing on tables
that relate to company payroll, for example.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 5 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits
(continued)
There are disadvantages of auditing.
• Auditing every action on every table can significantly reduce overall performance.
• For any field or record that you audit, a separate database transaction has to take
place in addition to the user action, which is detrimental to performance.
• Audit information is stored in separate tables, which can become quite large and
consume database server space.
Slide 444 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5 5

Discussing Advantages and Disadvantages of Implementing Audits
(continued)
The simplest audit to set up and monitor is the field-level audit.
• All audit information from field-level audits, regardless of where the field is located,
is stored in a central PSAUDIT table.
• You can set up auditing on a field in seconds.
Slide 445 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Before this class began, we configured some field level audits. Every time you made
changes in Student Personal Information, your actions wrote to an audit table.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 5 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Field Level Audits
A field level audit is a record field property. To configure a field level audit:
1. Open the desired record.
2. Double click the field you would like to audit.
3. In the Audit section, select Field Add, Field Change, or Field Delete.
4. Click the OK button.
Slide 446 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5 7

Implementing Field Level Audits (continued)
All field-level audit data is stored in the PSAUDIT table. You can view this table using
Query or using SQL commands. The PSAUDIT table contains the following fields:
• AUDIT_OPRID
• AUDIT_STAMP
• AUDIT_ACTN
• RECNAME
• FIELDNAME
• OLDVALUE
• NEWVALUE
• KEY1, KEY2, …
Slide 447 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This section discusses how to view data in the PSAUDIT table:
• View the contents of PSAUDIT using your database query tool and a SELECT
statement:
SELECT * FROM PSAUDIT

• Limit your query to a specific record definition by specifying it in a WHERE clause:
SELECT * FROM PSAUDIT
WHERE RECNAME = ‘PSU_STUDENT_TBL’

• Modify the WHERE clause to limit your query to a specific field on a specific record
definition:
SELECT * FROM PSAUDIT
WHERE RECNAME = ‘PSU_STUDENT_TBL’
AND FIELDNAME = ‘STUDENT_NAME’
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 5 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 64: Performing a Field-Level Audit
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
• Observe field-level settings
• View the contents of PSAUDIT.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 21, “Performing Data Audits,” Activity 64:
Performing a Field-Level Audit.
Slide 448 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 5 9

Implementing Record Level Audits
You can capture similar audit information at the record level. The initial setup is a little
more elaborate, but an audit table in your database is dedicated to auditing fields for a
specific record. To set up a record level audit:
1. Clone the record you want to audit.
2. Save the record as AUDIT_<original record name>.
3. Insert the audit fields as the first three fields.
4. Delete any fields that you do not want to track.
5. Remove all key structure.
6. Build the table.
7. Link the base record to the audit record and select the desired audit options.
Slide 449 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 6 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
To clone and save the record:
1. Open the record to audit.
2. Select File, Save As.
3. Enter AUDIT_<original record name> in the Save As field.
Slide 450 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
The field name is limited to 15 characters.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 6 1

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
Insert these three fields, in this order, as the first three fields in the record definition:
• AUDIT_OPRID.
• AUDIT_STAMP.
• AUDIT_ACTN.
Slide 451 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Note. For AUDIT_STAMP, select the Auto-Update check box in the Record Field
Properties dialog box otherwise the audit record doesn’t receive a date and time stamp.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 6 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
Delete fields that you do not want to audit:
• You should audit all fields that are keys in the original record to help determine the
unique row that included the action.
• To audit all fields in the record, skip this step.
• You cannot audit Long Character or Image fields.
Slide 452 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 6 3

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
Audit tables do not include keys or indexes.
1. Clear all key attributes.
2. Clear all duplicate order key attributes.
3. Clear all search key attributes.
Slide 453 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 6 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
The next step is to build the table.
Slide 454 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
This is the most often forgotten step. Remember to build the table.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 6 5

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
To link the base record to the audit record:
1. Open the record definition that you are auditing.
2. Select File, Definition Properties.
3. Select the Use tab.
4. Select the correct audit record definition from the Record Name drop-down list box.
5. Select the desired audit actions.
Slide 455 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
With record-level audits, you can track any combination of four actions.
• Add
• Change
• Selective
• Delete
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 6 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implementing Record Level Audits (continued)
The audit table records:
• Only the old values for non-key fields.
• Both the new and old values if you change a key value.
Slide 456 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
See PeopleTools 8.44 PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Application Designer, “Creating Record
Definitions”
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 1 Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 6 7

Activity 65: Implementing Record Level Audits
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Clone and save the record.
2. Insert the audit fields.
3. Delete unnecessary fields.
4. Remove all key structure, default values, and set auto update.
5. Build the table.
6. Link the base record to the audit record and select the desired audit options.
7. Test the auditing process.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 21, “Performing Data Audits,” Activity 65:
Implementing Record Level Audits.
Slide 457 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe r f or mi n g Da t a Au d i t s L e s s o n 2 1
4 6 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• You should use data audits that track user actions on selected fields or records
sparingly because they add overhead to tracked entries and increase database
resource requirements.
• To implement field-level auditing, you select the actions to track in the record
definition’s record field properties.
• To implement record-level auditing, you build a special audit record definition and
then link it to the record you want to audit.
Slide 458 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 6 9
L e s s o n 2 2
Importing and Exporting Projects
Objectives
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe how projects transport definitions between databases.
• Export projects.
• Import projects and build their tables.
Slide 460 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Projects allow quick access to the definitions that you are using. Projects are also
portable.
You can export the definitions that are in a project to an extensible markup language
(XML) file and then import them into another database. This is an invaluable tool for
developers who typically work in a development environment apart from production
databases.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 7 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases
A project is a collection of definitions. Use projects to:
• Organize definitions into related groups as you develop applications.
• Move definitions from one application database to another.
Slide 461 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 2 I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7 1

Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases
(continued)
Copying a project to a database is the most direct method. If you have connectivity to the
database to which you want to transfer the project, all definitions are loaded into the
target database’s tables, as shown in this diagram:
Development
Workstation
Source
Database
Target
Database
Project Project
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog

Transferring project data from one database to another
Slide 462 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 7 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases
(continued)
Copying to a file creates a series of XML files in a folder. After the project is in file form,
you can import the project from the target side, as shown in this diagram:
Development
Workstation
Source
Database
Target
Database
Project
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Application Data
PeopleTools
System Catalog
Project
Development
Workstation
Project
Files
Project
Project

Copying to file
Slide 463 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
Projects do not hold application data. If you have record definitions in your project, you
must build them in the new database to create the application data tables.
You can migrate application data with Data Mover script files.
This topic is covered in detail in the instructor-led course Data Administration Tools.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 2 I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7 3

Describing How Projects Transport Definitions Between Databases
(continued)
PeopleSoft distributes project files by means of download. Three levels of imports are
available:
• Fixes.
• Updates.
• Upgrades.
Slide 464 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 7 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Exporting Projects
Exporting a project is a simple procedure. To export a project to a file:
1. Open the project in Application Designer.
2. Select Tools, Copy Project, To File.
3. Select the definitions to copy.
4. Enter the output directory.
5. Click the Copy button.
Slide 465 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 2 I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7 5

Exporting Projects (continued)
The copy process creates two files:
• An XML file.
• An .ini file.
Slide 466 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 7 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 66: Exporting Projects
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Export a project.
2. Examine the project files.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 22, “Importing and Exporting Projects,”
Activity 66: Exporting Projects
Slide 467 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 2 I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7 7

Importing Projects
Importing a project is a nearly identical procedure to exporting a project. To import a
project from a file:
1. From PeopleSoft Application Designer, select Tools, Copy Project, From File.
2. Browse to select the project folder.
3. Select the definitions you want to copy.
4. Click Open.
5. Select Tools, Validate Project.
Slide 468 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 7 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Importing Projects (continued)
When you import a project with record definitions, you have to ensure that the SQL
tables they represent exist. You might have to:
• Build tables if they do not exist.
• Check changes to the definition to determine whether you should alter the underlying
tables.
Slide 469 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
When you select Build, there is an option to build an entire project. This applies the build
options you choose to all the record definitions in the current project. You can select an
option on the Build tab to skip existing records.
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 2 I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 7 9

Activity 67: Importing Projects
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and import the T1_IMPORT
project.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 22 “Importing and Exporting Projects,”
Activity 67: Importing Projects
Slide 470 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
I mp o r t i n g a n d Ex p o r t i n g Pr o j e c t s L e s s o n 2 2
4 8 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Review
In this lesson, you learned that:
• Projects are an excellent way to organize definitions during development or to
transport definitions between databases.
• When you export the current project to a file, you have an .ini file and an XML file
that contains all of the definition data.
• When you import a project, check the project integrity and consider whether the
underlying tables have to be built or altered.
Slide 471 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 8 1
L e s s o n 2 3
Final Course Activity
Objective
By the end of this lesson, you will be able to implement the eight steps that create an
application to evaluate training courses.
Slide 473 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Fi n a l Cou r s e Ac t i v i t y L e s s o n 2 3
4 8 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Activity 68: Creating a Course Evaluation Application
In this activity, you will review the activity overview and:
1. Design the application.
2. Create the data structures.
3. Create the user interface.
4. Test the application.
See PeopleTools I: Activity Guide, lesson 23 “Final Course Activity,” Activity 68:
Creating a Course Evaluation Application
Slide 474 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 8 3
L e s s o n 2 4
Course Review
Completed Objectives
In this course, you learned how to:
• Navigate a PeopleSoft application.
• Describe the elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (PIA).
• Describe PeopleSoft data organization and validation.
• Implement the eight step process of application development.
• Describe additional application development considerations.
• Perform searches and audits of application data.
• Organize definitions into projects.
Slide 476 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 8 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Navigating a PeopleSoft Application
One method you use to navigate a PeopleSoft application is the menu pagelet. To find
information you:
• Select a folder
• Select a content reference
• Enter values in the search fields
Slide 477 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 8 5

Navigating a PeopleSoft Application (continued)
Another method you use to navigate a PeopleSoft application is the search engine. To
find information you:
• Enter a value in the search field
• Click the Search button
• Select the appropriate content reference
Slide 478 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 8 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing the Elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
PeopleSoft Internet Architecture consists of:
• A database server
• An application server
• A web server
• A browser or other user input device
Slide 479 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 8 7

Describing the Elements of the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
(continued)
This illustration shows communication protocols between the different elements of
PeopleSoft Internet Architecture:
System
Catalog
Application
Data
People
Tools
Database
Server
Browser
HTML 4
Compatible
Browser
Web Server
Web
Services
HTML
Java
Services
Application
Server
PeopleSoft
Services
Tuxedo/Jolt Jolt
SQL

PeopleSoft Internet Architecture
Slide 480 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 8 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Describing PeopleSoft Data Organization and Validation
A PeopleSoft database has three types of tables:
System
Catalog
Application
Data
People
Tools

Types of tables
Slide 481 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 8 9

Describing PeopleSoft Data Organization and Validation (continued)
A PeopleSoft application uses application-level validations such as:
• Prompt table edits
• Translate table edits
• Yes/No table edits
Slide 482 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 9 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development
This diagram illustrates the eight step process:
User Interface
Test
Data Design
Plan
Test
Application
Define
Fields
Define
Records
Build
Tables
Define
Pages
Define
Components
Register
Components
Design
Application

Eight steps of application development
Slide 483 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9 1

Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development (continued)
When you plan, you construct the:
• Functional specifications
• Technical specifications
Slide 484 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 9 2 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development (continued)
In the data design phase you:
• Create the field definitions
• Create the record definitions
• Build the SQL table
Slide 485 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9 3

Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development (continued)
In the user interface phase you:
• Create the page definitions
• Create the component definitions
• Register the component
Slide 486 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 9 4 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Implement the Eight Step Process of Application Development (continued)
The testing phase includes:
• Adding high-level keys at level 0.
• Inserting, updating, and deleting data at level 1.
• Viewing and correcting historical data.
• Verifying prompts and defaults.
Slide 487 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9 5

Describing Additional Application Development Considerations
In addition to using the eight steps of application development, you should finish the
application by:
• Changing the search page title
• Creating menus for organizational purposes.
Slide 488 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 9 6 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Performing Searches and Audits of Application Data
Your PeopleSoft application uses a Verity search engine to locate data:
• You can customize your searches by adding keywords to content references and
folders.
• You must generate a new registry collection to use the new keywords.
Slide 489 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
L e s s o n 2 4 Co u r s e Re v i e w
Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9 7

Performing Searches and Audits of Application Data
You can monitor your data by:
• Creating field level audits.
• Creating record-level audits.
Slide 490 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Co u r s e Re v i e w L e s s o n 2 4
4 9 8 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Organizing Definitions into Projects
You can create project to:
• Transport definitions between databases.
• Upgrade definitions.
• Export definitions to a file.
Slide 491 ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
Student Notes
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!

Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l 4 9 9
Ap p e n d i x A
Curriculum Map









FOR
INTERNAL
USE
ONLY!
Pe o p l eTo o l s Cur r i c u l um Ma p Ap p e n d i x A
5 0 0 Pe o p l eSof t Pr o pr i e t ar y a n d Co nf i de n t i a l

Curriculum Map
410
PeopleTools II
5 days
Classroom
415
Process Scheduler
Administration and Report
Distribution
2 days
Classroom
420
PeopleCode
5 days
Classroom
411
Application Engine
4 days
Classroom
Development
Administration
Upgrade Course
KEY
400
PeopleTools I
5 days
Classroom
426
Workflow
4 days
Classroom
478
Data Management Tools
and Upgrade
5 days
Classroom
1022
Integration Tools
4 days
Classroom
405
PeopleTools Overview
2 days
Classroom
466
PeopleSoft Security
3 days
Classroom
471
PeopleSoft Server
Administration
4 days
Classroom
Enterprise Portal
1011
Enterprise Portal
Administration (8.4)
3 days
Classroom
1377
Concepts in Enterprise
Portal Development (8.4)
1 day
Live WebCast
Reporting 430
SQR
5 days
Classroom
435
PS/nVision Using Queries
4 days
Classroom
455
Query/Crystal Power
Combo
4 days
Classroom with
OnDemand
1533
Integrating Processes
and Reports
1 day
Live WebCast
1152
Query Reporting
2 days
Classroom with
OnDemand
OR
1011
Enterprise Portal
Administration (8.8)
5 days
Classroom

PeopleTools Curriculum Map

PeopleTools I STU-400-844 Restricted Rights Copyright 2004 PeopleSoft, Inc. All rights reserved. All material contained in this document is proprietary and confidential to PeopleSoft, Inc. and is protected by copyright laws. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including, but not limited to, electronic, graphic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior written permission of PeopleSoft, Inc.

FOR

This document is subject to change without notice, and PeopleSoft, Inc. does not warrant that the material contained in this document is free of errors. Any errors found in this document should be reported to PeopleSoft, Inc. in writing. PeopleTalk and “People power the internet.” are trademarks; and PeopleSoft, the PeopleSoft logo, PeopleTools, PS/nVision, PeopleCode, PeopleBooks, Vantive, Vantive Enterprise and Red Pepper are registered trademarks of PeopleSoft, Inc. All other trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.

INTERNAL USE ONLY!